chore(release): v3.0.0-beta.109 [skip ci]

fixes #8430

.git-blame-ignore-revs

@@ -19,3 +19,12 @@ fb7d1be2f3325d076b7c967b1730afcef37922c2
 
 # 3.0 prettier & lint everywhere
 6789e61488a1d3de56f472ac3214faf344030005
+
+# 3.0 prettier & lint everywhere again
+83fd4c66222d7846eeb5cc332dfa99bf1e830831
+
+# Upgrade to typescript-eslint v8, then prettier & lint everywhere
+86fdad0bb8ab27810599c8a32f3d8cba1341e1df
+
+# Prettier and lint remaining db packages
+7fd736ea5b2e9fc4ef936e9dc9e5e3d722f6d8bf

.github/CODEOWNERS

@@ -1,24 +1,23 @@
 # Order matters. The last matching pattern takes precedence.
+# Approvals are not required currently but may be enabled in the future.
 
 ### Package Exports ###
-/**/exports/ @denolfe @jmikrut
+/**/exports/ @denolfe @jmikrut @DanRibbens
 
 ### Packages ###
-/packages/richtext-*/ @AlessioGr
-/packages/plugin-cloud*/ @denolfe
-/packages/email-*/ @denolfe
-/packages/storage-*/ @denolfe
-/packages/create-payload-app/ @denolfe
-/packages/eslint-*/ @denolfe
+/packages/plugin-cloud*/src/ @denolfe
+/packages/email-*/src/ @denolfe
+/packages/storage-*/src/ @denolfe
+/packages/create-payload-app/src/ @denolfe
+/packages/eslint-*/ @denolfe @AlessioGr
 
 ### Templates ###
-/templates/ @jacobsfletch @denolfe
+/templates/_data/ @denolfe
+/templates/_template/ @denolfe
 
 ### Build Files ###
-/**/package.json @denolfe
 /tsconfig.json @denolfe
 /**/tsconfig*.json @denolfe
-
 /jest.config.js @denolfe
 /**/jest.config.js @denolfe
 
@@ -26,5 +25,5 @@
 /package.json @denolfe
 /scripts/ @denolfe
 /.husky/ @denolfe
-/.vscode/ @denolfe
+/.vscode/ @denolfe @AlessioGr
 /.github/ @denolfe

.github/actions/release-commenter/.eslintrc.js

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+module.exports = {
+  env: {
+    es6: true,
+    node: true,
+  },
+  extends: ['eslint:recommended', 'plugin:@typescript-eslint/eslint-recommended'],
+  parser: '@typescript-eslint/parser',
+  parserOptions: {
+    ecmaVersion: 2018,
+    sourceType: 'module',
+  },
+  plugins: ['@typescript-eslint'],
+}

.github/actions/release-commenter/README.md

@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+# Release Commenter
+
+This GitHub Action automatically comments on and/or labels Issues and PRs when a fix is released for them.
+
+> [!IMPORTANT]
+> 🔧 Heavily modified version of https://github.com/apexskier/github-release-commenter
+
+## Fork Modifications
+
+- Filters to closed PRs only
+- Adds tag filter to support non-linear releases
+- Better logging
+- Moved to pnpm
+- Uses @vercel/ncc for packaging
+- Comments on locked issues by unlocking then re-locking
+
+## How it works
+
+Use this action in a workflow [triggered by a release](https://docs.github.com/en/free-pro-team@latest/actions/reference/events-that-trigger-workflows#release). It will scan commits between that and the prior release, find associated Issues and PRs, and comment on them to let people know a release has been made. Associated Issues and PRs can be directly [linked](https://docs.github.com/en/free-pro-team@latest/github/managing-your-work-on-github/linking-a-pull-request-to-an-issue) to the commit or manually linked from a PR associated with the commit.
+
+## Inputs
+
+**GITHUB_TOKEN**
+
+A GitHub personal access token with repo scope, such as [`secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN`](https://docs.github.com/en/free-pro-team@latest/actions/reference/authentication-in-a-workflow#about-the-github_token-secret).
+
+**comment-template** (optional)
+
+Override the comment posted on Issues and PRs. Set to the empty string to disable commenting. Several variables strings will be automatically replaced:
+
+- `{release_link}` - a markdown link to the release
+- `{release_name}` - the release's name
+- `{release_tag}` - the release's tag
+
+**label-template** (optional)
+
+Add the given label. Multiple labels can be separated by commas. Several variable strings will be automatically replaced:
+
+- `{release_name}` - the release's name
+- `{release_tag}` - the release's tag
+
+**skip-label** (optional)
+
+Skip processing if any of the given labels are present. Same processing rules as **label-template**. Default is "dependencies".
+
+## Example
+
+```yml
+on:
+  release:
+    types: [published]
+
+jobs:
+  release:
+    steps:
+      - uses: apexskier/github-release-commenter@v1
+        with:
+          GITHUB_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}
+          comment-template: |
+            Release {release_link} addresses this.
+```
+
+## Known limitations
+
+These are some known limitations of this action. I'd like to try to address them in the future.
+
+- Non-linear releases aren't supported. For example, releasing a patch to a prior major release after a new major release has been bumped.
+- Non-sequential releases aren't supported. For example, if you release multiple prereleases between two official releases, this will only create a comment for the first prerelease in which a fix is released, not the final release.
+- The first release for a project will be ignored. This is intentional, as the use case is unlikely. Most projects will either have several alphas that don't need release comments, or won't use issues/PRs for the first commit.
+- If a large number of things are commented on, you may see the error `Error: You have triggered an abuse detection mechanism. Please wait a few minutes before you try again.`. Consider using the `skip-label` input to reduce your load on the GitHub API.
+
+## Versions
+
+Workflows will automatically update the tags `v1` and `latest`, allowing you to reference one of those instead of locking to a specific release.

.github/actions/release-commenter/action.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+name: Release Commenter
+description: Comment on PRs and Issues when a fix is released
+branding:
+  icon: message-square
+  color: blue
+inputs:
+  GITHUB_TOKEN:
+    description: |
+      A GitHub personal access token with repo scope, such as
+      secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN.
+    required: true
+  comment-template:
+    description: |
+      Text template for the comment string.
+    required: false
+    default: |
+      Included in release {release_link}
+  label-template:
+    description: Add the given label. Multiple labels can be separated by commas.
+    required: false
+  skip-label:
+    description: Skip commenting if any of the given label are present. Multiple labels can be separated by commas.
+    required: false
+    default: 'dependencies'
+  tag-filter:
+    description: |
+      Filter tags by a regular expression. Must be escaped. e.g. 'v\\d' to isolate tags between major versions.
+    required: false
+    default: null
+runs:
+  using: node20
+  main: dist/index.js

.github/actions/release-commenter/jest.config.js

@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+module.exports = {
+  testEnvironment: 'node',
+  testPathIgnorePatterns: ['/node_modules/', '<rootDir>/dist/'],
+  transform: {
+    '^.+\\.(t|j)sx?$': ['@swc/jest'],
+  },
+}

.github/actions/release-commenter/package.json

@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+{
+  "name": "release-commenter",
+  "version": "0.0.0",
+  "private": true,
+  "description": "GitHub Action to automatically comment on PRs and Issues when a fix is released.",
+  "license": "MIT",
+  "main": "dist/index.js",
+  "scripts": {
+    "build": "pnpm build:typecheck && pnpm build:ncc",
+    "build:ncc": "ncc build src/index.ts -t -o dist",
+    "build:typecheck": "tsc",
+    "clean": "rimraf dist",
+    "test": "jest"
+  },
+  "dependencies": {
+    "@actions/core": "^1.3.0",
+    "@actions/github": "^5.0.0"
+  },
+  "devDependencies": {
+    "@octokit/webhooks-types": "^7.5.1",
+    "@swc/jest": "^0.2.36",
+    "@types/jest": "^27.5.2",
+    "@types/node": "^20.16.5",
+    "@typescript-eslint/eslint-plugin": "^4.33.0",
+    "@typescript-eslint/parser": "^4.33.0",
+    "@vercel/ncc": "0.38.1",
+    "concurrently": "^8.2.2",
+    "eslint": "^7.32.0",
+    "jest": "^29.7.0",
+    "prettier": "^3.3.3",
+    "ts-jest": "^26.5.6",
+    "typescript": "^4.9.5"
+  }
+}

.github/actions/release-commenter/src/__snapshots__/index.test.ts.snap

@@ -0,0 +1,266 @@
+// Jest Snapshot v1, https://goo.gl/fbAQLP
+
+exports[`tests feature tests can apply labels 1`] = `
+[
+  [
+    {
+      "issue_number": 123,
+      "labels": [
+        ":dart: landed",
+        "release-current_tag_name",
+        "Release Name",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  [
+    {
+      "issue_number": 7,
+      "labels": [
+        ":dart: landed",
+        "release-current_tag_name",
+        "Release Name",
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+]
+`;
+
+exports[`tests main test 1`] = `
+{
+  "graphql": [MockFunction] {
+    "calls": [
+      [
+        "
+            {
+              resource(url: "http://repository/commit/SHA1") {
+                ... on Commit {
+                  messageHeadlineHTML
+                  messageBodyHTML
+                  associatedPullRequests(first: 10) {
+                    pageInfo {
+                      hasNextPage
+                    }
+                    edges {
+                      node {
+                        bodyHTML
+                        number
+                        state
+                        labels(first: 10) {
+                          pageInfo {
+                            hasNextPage
+                          }
+                          nodes {
+                            name
+                          }
+                        }
+                        timelineItems(itemTypes: [CONNECTED_EVENT, DISCONNECTED_EVENT], first: 100) {
+                          pageInfo {
+                            hasNextPage
+                          }
+                          nodes {
+                            ... on ConnectedEvent {
+                              __typename
+                              isCrossRepository
+                              subject {
+                                ... on Issue {
+                                  number
+                                }
+                              }
+                            }
+                            ... on DisconnectedEvent {
+                              __typename
+                              isCrossRepository
+                              subject {
+                                ... on Issue {
+                                  number
+                                }
+                              }
+                            }
+                          }
+                        }
+                      }
+                    }
+                  }
+                }
+              }
+            }
+          ",
+      ],
+      [
+        "
+            {
+              resource(url: "http://repository/commit/SHA2") {
+                ... on Commit {
+                  messageHeadlineHTML
+                  messageBodyHTML
+                  associatedPullRequests(first: 10) {
+                    pageInfo {
+                      hasNextPage
+                    }
+                    edges {
+                      node {
+                        bodyHTML
+                        number
+                        state
+                        labels(first: 10) {
+                          pageInfo {
+                            hasNextPage
+                          }
+                          nodes {
+                            name
+                          }
+                        }
+                        timelineItems(itemTypes: [CONNECTED_EVENT, DISCONNECTED_EVENT], first: 100) {
+                          pageInfo {
+                            hasNextPage
+                          }
+                          nodes {
+                            ... on ConnectedEvent {
+                              __typename
+                              isCrossRepository
+                              subject {
+                                ... on Issue {
+                                  number
+                                }
+                              }
+                            }
+                            ... on DisconnectedEvent {
+                              __typename
+                              isCrossRepository
+                              subject {
+                                ... on Issue {
+                                  number
+                                }
+                              }
+                            }
+                          }
+                        }
+                      }
+                    }
+                  }
+                }
+              }
+            }
+          ",
+      ],
+    ],
+    "results": [
+      {
+        "type": "return",
+        "value": Promise {},
+      },
+      {
+        "type": "return",
+        "value": Promise {},
+      },
+    ],
+  },
+  "rest": {
+    "issues": {
+      "addLabels": [MockFunction],
+      "createComment": [MockFunction] {
+        "calls": [
+          [
+            {
+              "body": "Included in release [current_tag_name](http://current_release). Replacements: current_tag_name, current_tag_name.",
+              "issue_number": 3,
+            },
+          ],
+          [
+            {
+              "body": "Included in release [current_tag_name](http://current_release). Replacements: current_tag_name, current_tag_name.",
+              "issue_number": 123,
+            },
+          ],
+          [
+            {
+              "body": "Included in release [current_tag_name](http://current_release). Replacements: current_tag_name, current_tag_name.",
+              "issue_number": 7,
+            },
+          ],
+        ],
+        "results": [
+          {
+            "type": "return",
+            "value": Promise {},
+          },
+          {
+            "type": "return",
+            "value": Promise {},
+          },
+          {
+            "type": "return",
+            "value": Promise {},
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+      "get": [MockFunction] {
+        "calls": [
+          [
+            {
+              "issue_number": 3,
+            },
+          ],
+          [
+            {
+              "issue_number": 123,
+            },
+          ],
+          [
+            {
+              "issue_number": 7,
+            },
+          ],
+        ],
+        "results": [
+          {
+            "type": "return",
+            "value": Promise {},
+          },
+          {
+            "type": "return",
+            "value": Promise {},
+          },
+          {
+            "type": "return",
+            "value": Promise {},
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+    "repos": {
+      "compareCommits": [MockFunction] {
+        "calls": [
+          [
+            {
+              "base": "prior_tag_name",
+              "head": "current_tag_name",
+            },
+          ],
+        ],
+        "results": [
+          {
+            "type": "return",
+            "value": Promise {},
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+      "listReleases": [MockFunction] {
+        "calls": [
+          [
+            {
+              "per_page": 100,
+            },
+          ],
+        ],
+        "results": [
+          {
+            "type": "return",
+            "value": Promise {},
+          },
+        ],
+      },
+    },
+  },
+}
+`;

.github/actions/release-commenter/src/index.test.ts

@@ -0,0 +1,399 @@
+import type * as githubModule from '@actions/github'
+import type * as coreModule from '@actions/core'
+import { mock } from 'node:test'
+
+jest.mock('@actions/core')
+jest.mock('@actions/github')
+
+type Mocked<T> = {
+  -readonly [P in keyof T]: T[P] extends Function ? jest.Mock<T[P]> : jest.Mocked<Partial<T[P]>>
+}
+
+const github = require('@actions/github') as jest.Mocked<Mocked<typeof githubModule>>
+const core = require('@actions/core') as jest.Mocked<Mocked<typeof coreModule>>
+
+describe('tests', () => {
+  let mockOctokit: any = {}
+  let currentTag: string = 'current_tag_name'
+
+  ;(core.warning as any) = jest.fn(console.warn.bind(console))
+  ;(core.error as any) = jest.fn(console.error.bind(console))
+
+  let commentTempate: string = ''
+  let labelTemplate: string | null = null
+  const skipLabelTemplate: string | null = 'skip,test'
+  let tagFilter: string | RegExp | null = null
+
+  let simpleMockOctokit: any = {}
+
+  beforeEach(() => {
+    tagFilter = null
+    currentTag = 'current_tag_name'
+    ;(github.context as any) = {
+      payload: {
+        repo: {
+          owner: 'owner',
+          repo: 'repo',
+        },
+        release: {
+          tag_name: currentTag,
+        },
+        repository: { html_url: 'http://repository' },
+      },
+    }
+
+    github.getOctokit.mockReset().mockImplementationOnce(((token: string) => {
+      expect(token).toBe('GITHUB_TOKEN_VALUE')
+      return mockOctokit
+    }) as any)
+    ;(core.getInput as any).mockImplementation((key: string) => {
+      if (key == 'GITHUB_TOKEN') {
+        return 'GITHUB_TOKEN_VALUE'
+      }
+      if (key == 'comment-template') {
+        return commentTempate
+      }
+      if (key == 'label-template') {
+        return labelTemplate
+      }
+      if (key == 'skip-label') {
+        return skipLabelTemplate
+      }
+      if (key == 'tag-filter') {
+        return tagFilter
+      }
+      fail(`Unexpected input key ${key}`)
+    })
+
+    commentTempate =
+      'Included in release {release_link}. Replacements: {release_name}, {release_tag}.'
+    labelTemplate = null
+    simpleMockOctokit = {
+      rest: {
+        issues: {
+          get: jest.fn(() => Promise.resolve({ data: { locked: false } })),
+          createComment: jest.fn(() => Promise.resolve()),
+          addLabels: jest.fn(() => Promise.resolve()),
+        },
+        repos: {
+          listReleases: jest.fn(() =>
+            Promise.resolve({
+              data: [
+                {
+                  name: 'Release Name',
+                  tag_name: 'current_tag_name',
+                  html_url: 'http://current_release',
+                },
+                {
+                  tag_name: 'prior_tag_name',
+                  html_url: 'http://prior_release',
+                },
+              ],
+            }),
+          ),
+          compareCommits: jest.fn(() =>
+            Promise.resolve({
+              data: { commits: [{ sha: 'SHA1' }] },
+            }),
+          ),
+        },
+      },
+      graphql: jest.fn(() =>
+        Promise.resolve({
+          resource: {
+            messageHeadlineHTML: '',
+            messageBodyHTML:
+              '<span class="issue-keyword tooltipped tooltipped-se" aria-label="This commit closes issue #123.">Closes</span> <p><span class="issue-keyword tooltipped tooltipped-se" aria-label="This pull request closes issue #7.">Closes</span>',
+            associatedPullRequests: {
+              pageInfo: { hasNextPage: false },
+              edges: [],
+            },
+          },
+        }),
+      ),
+    }
+  })
+
+  afterEach(() => {
+    expect(core.error).not.toHaveBeenCalled()
+    expect(core.warning).not.toHaveBeenCalled()
+    expect(core.setFailed).not.toHaveBeenCalled()
+  })
+
+  test('main test', async () => {
+    mockOctokit = {
+      ...simpleMockOctokit,
+      rest: {
+        issues: {
+          get: jest.fn(() => Promise.resolve({ data: { locked: false } })),
+          createComment: jest.fn(() => Promise.resolve()),
+          addLabels: jest.fn(() => Promise.resolve()),
+        },
+        repos: {
+          listReleases: jest.fn(() =>
+            Promise.resolve({
+              data: [
+                {
+                  tag_name: 'current_tag_name',
+                  html_url: 'http://current_release',
+                },
+                {
+                  tag_name: 'prior_tag_name',
+                  html_url: 'http://prior_release',
+                },
+              ],
+            }),
+          ),
+          compareCommits: jest.fn(() =>
+            Promise.resolve({
+              data: { commits: [{ sha: 'SHA1' }, { sha: 'SHA2' }] },
+            }),
+          ),
+        },
+      },
+      graphql: jest.fn(() =>
+        Promise.resolve({
+          resource: {
+            messageHeadlineHTML:
+              '<span class="issue-keyword tooltipped tooltipped-se" aria-label="This commit closes issue #3.">Closes</span> <a class="issue-link js-issue-link" data-error-text="Failed to load title" data-id="718013420" data-permission-text="Title is private" data-url="https://github.com/apexskier/github-release-commenter/issues/1" data-hovercard-type="issue" data-hovercard-url="/apexskier/github-release-commenter/issues/1/hovercard" href="https://github.com/apexskier/github-release-commenter/issues/1">#1</a>',
+            messageBodyHTML:
+              '<span class="issue-keyword tooltipped tooltipped-se" aria-label="This commit closes issue #123.">Closes</span> <p><span class="issue-keyword tooltipped tooltipped-se" aria-label="This pull request closes issue #7.">Closes</span>',
+            associatedPullRequests: {
+              pageInfo: { hasNextPage: false },
+              edges: [
+                {
+                  node: {
+                    bodyHTML:
+                      '<span class="issue-keyword tooltipped tooltipped-se" aria-label="This commit closes issue #4.">Closes</span> <span class="issue-keyword tooltipped tooltipped-se" aria-label="This commit closes issue #5.">Closes</span>',
+                    number: 9,
+                    labels: {
+                      pageInfo: { hasNextPage: false },
+                      nodes: [{ name: 'label1' }, { name: 'label2' }],
+                    },
+                    timelineItems: {
+                      pageInfo: { hasNextPage: false },
+                      nodes: [
+                        {
+                          isCrossRepository: true,
+                          __typename: 'ConnectedEvent',
+                          subject: { number: 1 },
+                        },
+                        {
+                          isCrossRepository: false,
+                          __typename: 'ConnectedEvent',
+                          subject: { number: 2 },
+                        },
+                        {
+                          isCrossRepository: false,
+                          __typename: 'DisconnectedEvent',
+                          subject: { number: 2 },
+                        },
+                        {
+                          isCrossRepository: false,
+                          __typename: 'ConnectedEvent',
+                          subject: { number: 2 },
+                        },
+                      ],
+                    },
+                  },
+                },
+                {
+                  node: {
+                    bodyHTML: '',
+                    number: 42,
+                    labels: {
+                      pageInfo: { hasNextPage: false },
+                      nodes: [{ name: 'label1' }, { name: 'skip' }],
+                    },
+                    timelineItems: {
+                      pageInfo: { hasNextPage: false },
+                      nodes: [
+                        {
+                          isCrossRepository: true,
+                          __typename: 'ConnectedEvent',
+                          subject: { number: 82 },
+                        },
+                      ],
+                    },
+                  },
+                },
+              ],
+            },
+          },
+        }),
+      ),
+    }
+
+    jest.isolateModules(() => {
+      require('./index')
+    })
+
+    await new Promise<void>(setImmediate)
+
+    expect(mockOctokit).toMatchSnapshot()
+    expect(mockOctokit.rest.issues.createComment).toHaveBeenCalledTimes(3)
+  })
+
+  describe('can filter tags', () => {
+    const v3prev = 'v3.0.1'
+    const v3current = 'v3.0.2'
+    const v2prev = 'v2.0.1'
+    const v2current = 'v2.0.2'
+
+    const listReleasesData = [
+      {
+        name: 'Current Release Name',
+        tag_name: v3current,
+        html_url: 'http://v3.0.2',
+      },
+      {
+        name: 'Prev Release Name',
+        tag_name: v3prev,
+        html_url: 'http://v3.0.1',
+      },
+      {
+        name: 'v2 Current Release Name',
+        tag_name: v2current,
+        html_url: 'http://v2.0.2',
+      },
+      {
+        name: 'v2 Prev Release Name',
+        tag_name: v2prev,
+        html_url: 'http://v2.0.1',
+      },
+    ]
+
+    it.each`
+      description    | prevTag   | currentTag   | filter
+      ${'no filter'} | ${v3prev} | ${v3current} | ${null}
+      ${'v3'}        | ${v3prev} | ${v3current} | ${'v\\d'}
+      ${'v2'}        | ${v2prev} | ${v2current} | ${'v\\d'}
+    `('should filter tags with $description', async ({ prevTag, currentTag, filter }) => {
+      // @ts-ignore
+      github.context.payload.release.tag_name = currentTag
+
+      tagFilter = filter
+
+      mockOctokit = {
+        ...simpleMockOctokit,
+        rest: {
+          issues: {
+            get: jest.fn(() => Promise.resolve({ data: { locked: false } })),
+            createComment: jest.fn(() => Promise.resolve()),
+            addLabels: jest.fn(() => Promise.resolve()),
+          },
+          repos: {
+            listReleases: jest.fn(() =>
+              Promise.resolve({
+                data: listReleasesData,
+              }),
+            ),
+            compareCommits: jest.fn(() =>
+              Promise.resolve({
+                data: { commits: [{ sha: 'SHA1' }] },
+              }),
+            ),
+          },
+        },
+        graphql: jest.fn(() =>
+          Promise.resolve({
+            resource: {
+              messageHeadlineHTML: '',
+              messageBodyHTML:
+                '<span class="issue-keyword tooltipped tooltipped-se" aria-label="This commit closes issue #123.">Closes</span> <p><span class="issue-keyword tooltipped tooltipped-se" aria-label="This pull request closes issue #7.">Closes</span>',
+              associatedPullRequests: {
+                pageInfo: { hasNextPage: false },
+                edges: [],
+              },
+            },
+          }),
+        ),
+      }
+
+      jest.isolateModules(() => {
+        require('./index')
+      })
+
+      await new Promise<void>((resolve) => setImmediate(() => resolve()))
+
+      expect(github.getOctokit).toHaveBeenCalled()
+      expect(mockOctokit.rest.repos.compareCommits.mock.calls).toEqual([
+        [{ base: prevTag, head: currentTag }],
+      ])
+    })
+  })
+
+  describe('feature tests', () => {
+    beforeEach(() => {
+      mockOctokit = simpleMockOctokit
+    })
+
+    it('can disable comments', async () => {
+      commentTempate = ''
+
+      jest.isolateModules(() => {
+        require('./index')
+      })
+
+      await new Promise<void>((resolve) => setImmediate(() => resolve()))
+
+      expect(github.getOctokit).toHaveBeenCalled()
+      expect(mockOctokit.rest.issues.createComment).not.toHaveBeenCalled()
+    })
+
+    it('should unlock and comment', async () => {
+      mockOctokit = {
+        ...simpleMockOctokit,
+        rest: {
+          ...simpleMockOctokit.rest,
+          issues: {
+            // Return locked for both issues to be commented on
+            get: jest.fn(() => Promise.resolve({ data: { locked: true } })),
+            lock: jest.fn(() => Promise.resolve()),
+            unlock: jest.fn(() => Promise.resolve()),
+            createComment: jest.fn(() => Promise.resolve()),
+          },
+        },
+        graphql: jest.fn(() =>
+          Promise.resolve({
+            resource: {
+              messageHeadlineHTML: '',
+              messageBodyHTML:
+                '<span class="issue-keyword tooltipped tooltipped-se" aria-label="This commit closes issue #123.">Closes</span> <p><span class="issue-keyword tooltipped tooltipped-se" aria-label="This pull request closes issue #7.">Closes</span>',
+              associatedPullRequests: {
+                pageInfo: { hasNextPage: false },
+                edges: [],
+              },
+            },
+          }),
+        ),
+      }
+
+      jest.isolateModules(() => {
+        require('./index')
+      })
+
+      await new Promise<void>((resolve) => setImmediate(() => resolve()))
+
+      expect(github.getOctokit).toHaveBeenCalled()
+
+      // Should call once for both linked issues
+      expect(mockOctokit.rest.issues.unlock).toHaveBeenCalledTimes(2)
+      expect(mockOctokit.rest.issues.createComment).toHaveBeenCalledTimes(2)
+      expect(mockOctokit.rest.issues.lock).toHaveBeenCalledTimes(2)
+    })
+
+    it.skip('can apply labels', async () => {
+      labelTemplate = ':dart: landed,release-{release_tag},{release_name}'
+
+      jest.isolateModules(() => {
+        require('./index')
+      })
+
+      await new Promise<void>((resolve) => setImmediate(() => resolve()))
+
+      expect(github.getOctokit).toHaveBeenCalled()
+      expect(mockOctokit.rest.issues.addLabels.mock.calls).toMatchSnapshot()
+    })
+  })
+})

.github/actions/release-commenter/src/index.ts

@@ -0,0 +1,349 @@
+import * as core from '@actions/core'
+import * as github from '@actions/github'
+import type * as Webhooks from '@octokit/webhooks-types'
+
+const closesMatcher = /aria-label="This (?:commit|pull request) closes issue #(\d+)\."/g
+
+const releaseLinkTemplateRegex = /{release_link}/g
+const releaseNameTemplateRegex = /{release_name}/g
+const releaseTagTemplateRegex = /{release_tag}/g
+
+;(async function main() {
+  try {
+    const payload = github.context.payload as Webhooks.EventPayloadMap['release']
+
+    const githubToken = core.getInput('GITHUB_TOKEN')
+    const tagFilter = core.getInput('tag-filter') || undefined // Accept tag filter as an input
+    const octokit = github.getOctokit(githubToken)
+
+    const commentTemplate = core.getInput('comment-template')
+    const labelTemplate = core.getInput('label-template') || null
+    const skipLabelTemplate = core.getInput('skip-label') || null
+
+    // Fetch the releases with the optional tag filter applied
+    const { data: rawReleases } = await octokit.rest.repos.listReleases({
+      ...github.context.repo,
+      per_page: 100,
+    })
+
+    // Get the current release tag or latest tag
+    const currentTag = payload?.release?.tag_name || rawReleases?.[0]?.tag_name
+
+    let releases = rawReleases
+
+    // Filter releases by the tag filter if provided
+    if (tagFilter) {
+      core.info(`Filtering releases by tag filter: ${tagFilter}`)
+      // Get the matching part of the current release tag
+      const regexMatch = currentTag.match(tagFilter)?.[0]
+      if (!regexMatch) {
+        core.error(`Current release tag ${currentTag} does not match the tag filter ${tagFilter}`)
+        return
+      }
+
+      core.info(`Matched string from filter: ${regexMatch}`)
+
+      releases = releases
+        .filter((release) => {
+          const match = release.tag_name.match(regexMatch)?.[0]
+          return match
+        })
+        .slice(0, 2)
+    }
+
+    core.info(`Releases: ${JSON.stringify(releases, null, 2)}`)
+
+    if (releases.length < 2) {
+      if (!releases.length) {
+        core.error(`No releases found with the provided tag filter: '${tagFilter}'`)
+        return
+      }
+
+      core.info('first release')
+      return
+    }
+
+    const [currentRelease, priorRelease] = releases
+
+    core.info(`${priorRelease.tag_name}...${currentRelease.tag_name}`)
+
+    const {
+      data: { commits },
+    } = await octokit.rest.repos.compareCommits({
+      ...github.context.repo,
+      base: priorRelease.tag_name,
+      head: currentRelease.tag_name,
+    })
+
+    if (!currentRelease.name) {
+      core.info('Current release has no name, will fall back to the tag name.')
+    }
+    const releaseLabel = currentRelease.name || currentRelease.tag_name
+
+    const comment = commentTemplate
+      .trim()
+      .split(releaseLinkTemplateRegex)
+      .join(`[${releaseLabel}](${currentRelease.html_url})`)
+      .split(releaseNameTemplateRegex)
+      .join(releaseLabel)
+      .split(releaseTagTemplateRegex)
+      .join(currentRelease.tag_name)
+
+    const parseLabels = (rawInput: string | null) =>
+      rawInput
+        ?.split(releaseNameTemplateRegex)
+        .join(releaseLabel)
+        ?.split(releaseTagTemplateRegex)
+        .join(currentRelease.tag_name)
+        ?.split(',')
+        ?.map((l) => l.trim())
+        .filter((l) => l)
+
+    const labels = parseLabels(labelTemplate)
+    const skipLabels = parseLabels(skipLabelTemplate)
+
+    const linkedIssuesPrs = new Set<number>()
+
+    await Promise.all(
+      commits.map((commit) =>
+        (async () => {
+          const query = `
+            {
+              resource(url: "${payload.repository.html_url}/commit/${commit.sha}") {
+                ... on Commit {
+                  messageHeadlineHTML
+                  messageBodyHTML
+                  associatedPullRequests(first: 10) {
+                    pageInfo {
+                      hasNextPage
+                    }
+                    edges {
+                      node {
+                        bodyHTML
+                        number
+                        state
+                        labels(first: 10) {
+                          pageInfo {
+                            hasNextPage
+                          }
+                          nodes {
+                            name
+                          }
+                        }
+                        timelineItems(itemTypes: [CONNECTED_EVENT, DISCONNECTED_EVENT], first: 100) {
+                          pageInfo {
+                            hasNextPage
+                          }
+                          nodes {
+                            ... on ConnectedEvent {
+                              __typename
+                              isCrossRepository
+                              subject {
+                                ... on Issue {
+                                  number
+                                }
+                              }
+                            }
+                            ... on DisconnectedEvent {
+                              __typename
+                              isCrossRepository
+                              subject {
+                                ... on Issue {
+                                  number
+                                }
+                              }
+                            }
+                          }
+                        }
+                      }
+                    }
+                  }
+                }
+              }
+            }
+          `
+          const response: {
+            resource: null | {
+              messageHeadlineHTML: string
+              messageBodyHTML: string
+              associatedPullRequests: {
+                pageInfo: { hasNextPage: boolean }
+                edges: ReadonlyArray<{
+                  node: {
+                    bodyHTML: string
+                    number: number
+                    state: 'OPEN' | 'CLOSED' | 'MERGED'
+                    labels: {
+                      pageInfo: { hasNextPage: boolean }
+                      nodes: ReadonlyArray<{
+                        name: string
+                      }>
+                    }
+                    timelineItems: {
+                      pageInfo: { hasNextPage: boolean }
+                      nodes: ReadonlyArray<{
+                        __typename: 'ConnectedEvent' | 'DisconnectedEvent'
+                        isCrossRepository: boolean
+                        subject: {
+                          number: number
+                        }
+                      }>
+                    }
+                  }
+                }>
+              }
+            }
+          } = await octokit.graphql(query)
+
+          if (!response.resource) {
+            return
+          }
+
+          // core.info(JSON.stringify(response.resource, null, 2))
+
+          core.info(`Checking commit: ${payload.repository.html_url}/commit/${commit.sha}`)
+
+          const associatedClosedPREdges = response.resource.associatedPullRequests.edges.filter(
+            (e) => e.node.state === 'MERGED',
+          )
+
+          if (associatedClosedPREdges.length) {
+            core.info(
+              `  Associated Merged PRs:\n    ${associatedClosedPREdges.map((pr) => `${payload.repository.html_url}/pull/${pr.node.number}`).join('\n    ')}`,
+            )
+          } else {
+            core.info('  No associated merged PRs')
+          }
+
+          const html = [
+            response.resource.messageHeadlineHTML,
+            response.resource.messageBodyHTML,
+            ...associatedClosedPREdges.map((pr) => pr.node.bodyHTML),
+          ].join(' ')
+
+          for (const match of html.matchAll(closesMatcher)) {
+            const [, num] = match
+            linkedIssuesPrs.add(parseInt(num, 10))
+            core.info(
+              `  Linked issue/PR from closesMatcher: ${payload.repository.html_url}/pull/${num}`,
+            )
+          }
+
+          if (response.resource.associatedPullRequests.pageInfo.hasNextPage) {
+            core.warning(`Too many PRs associated with ${commit.sha}`)
+          }
+
+          const seen = new Set<number>()
+          for (const associatedPR of associatedClosedPREdges) {
+            if (associatedPR.node.timelineItems.pageInfo.hasNextPage) {
+              core.warning(`Too many links for #${associatedPR.node.number}`)
+            }
+            if (associatedPR.node.labels.pageInfo.hasNextPage) {
+              core.warning(`Too many labels for #${associatedPR.node.number}`)
+            }
+            // a skip labels is present on this PR
+            if (
+              skipLabels?.some((l) => associatedPR.node.labels.nodes.some(({ name }) => name === l))
+            ) {
+              continue
+            }
+
+            linkedIssuesPrs.add(associatedPR.node.number)
+            core.info(
+              `  Linked issue/PR from associated PR: ${payload.repository.html_url}/pull/${associatedPR.node.number}`,
+            )
+
+            // These are sorted by creation date in ascending order. The latest event for a given issue/PR is all we need
+            // ignore links that aren't part of this repo
+            const links = associatedPR.node.timelineItems.nodes
+              .filter((node) => !node.isCrossRepository)
+              .reverse()
+            for (const link of links) {
+              if (seen.has(link.subject.number)) {
+                continue
+              }
+              if (link.__typename == 'ConnectedEvent') {
+                linkedIssuesPrs.add(link.subject.number)
+                core.info(
+                  `Linked issue/PR from connected event: ${payload.repository.html_url}/pull/${link.subject.number}`,
+                )
+              }
+              seen.add(link.subject.number)
+            }
+          }
+        })(),
+      ),
+    )
+
+    core.info(
+      `Final issues/PRs to be commented on: \n${Array.from(linkedIssuesPrs)
+        .map((num) => `  ${payload.repository.html_url}/pull/${num}`)
+        .join('\n')}`,
+    )
+
+    const requests: Array<Promise<unknown>> = []
+    for (const issueNumber of linkedIssuesPrs) {
+      const baseRequest = {
+        ...github.context.repo,
+        issue_number: issueNumber,
+      }
+      if (comment) {
+        const commentRequest = {
+          ...baseRequest,
+          body: comment,
+        }
+
+        // Check if issue is locked or not
+        const { data: issue } = await octokit.rest.issues.get(baseRequest)
+
+        let createCommentPromise: () => Promise<void>
+        if (!issue.locked) {
+          createCommentPromise = async () => {
+            try {
+              await octokit.rest.issues.createComment(commentRequest)
+            } catch (error) {
+              core.error(error as Error)
+              core.error(
+                `Failed to comment on issue/PR: ${issueNumber}. ${payload.repository.html_url}/pull/${issueNumber}`,
+              )
+            }
+          }
+        } else {
+          core.info(
+            `Issue/PR is locked: ${issueNumber}. Unlocking, commenting, and re-locking. ${payload.repository.html_url}/pull/${issueNumber}`,
+          )
+          createCommentPromise = async () => {
+            try {
+              core.debug(`Unlocking issue/PR: ${issueNumber}`)
+              await octokit.rest.issues.unlock(baseRequest)
+              core.debug(`Commenting on issue/PR: ${issueNumber}`)
+              await octokit.rest.issues.createComment(commentRequest)
+              core.debug(`Re-locking issue/PR: ${issueNumber}`)
+              await octokit.rest.issues.lock(baseRequest)
+            } catch (error) {
+              core.error(error as Error)
+              core.error(
+                `Failed to unlock, comment, and re-lock issue/PR: ${issueNumber}. ${payload.repository.html_url}/pull/${issueNumber}`,
+              )
+            }
+          }
+        }
+
+        requests.push(createCommentPromise())
+      }
+      if (labels) {
+        const request = {
+          ...baseRequest,
+          labels,
+        }
+        // core.info(JSON.stringify(request, null, 2))
+        requests.push(octokit.rest.issues.addLabels(request))
+      }
+    }
+
+    await Promise.all(requests)
+  } catch (error) {
+    core.error(error as Error)
+    core.setFailed((error as Error).message)
+  }
+})()

.github/actions/release-commenter/tsconfig.json

@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+{
+  "compilerOptions": {
+    "target": "es5",
+    "lib": ["es2020.string"],
+    "noEmit": true,
+    "strict": true,
+    "noUnusedLocals": true,
+    "noImplicitReturns": true,
+    "noFallthroughCasesInSwitch": true,
+    "forceConsistentCasingInFileNames": true,
+    "downlevelIteration": true,
+    "skipLibCheck": true,
+  },
+  "exclude": ["src/**/*.test.ts"]
+}

.github/actions/setup/action.yml

@@ -5,11 +5,11 @@ inputs:
   node-version:
     description: 'The Node.js version to use'
     required: true
-    default: 18.20.2
+    default: 22.6.2
   pnpm-version:
     description: 'The pnpm version to use'
     required: true
-    default: 8.15.7
+    default: 9.7.1
 
 runs:
   using: composite
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ runs:
         node-version: ${{ inputs.node-version }}
 
     - name: Install pnpm
-      uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+      uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
       with:
         version: ${{ inputs.pnpm-version }}
         run_install: false

.github/pnpm-workspace.yaml

@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+packages:
+  - 'actions/*'

.github/workflows/label-author.yml

@@ -32,8 +32,26 @@ jobs:
           script: |
             const type = context.payload.pull_request ? 'pull_request' : 'issue';
             const association = context.payload[type].author_association;
-            let label = ''
-            if (association === 'MEMBER' || association === 'OWNER') {
+            let label = '';
+            if (
+              association === 'MEMBER' ||
+              association === 'OWNER' ||
+              [
+                'denolfe',
+                'jmikrut',
+                'danribbens',
+
+                'alessiogr',
+                'jacobsfletch',
+                'jarrodmflesch',
+                'jesschowdhury',
+                'kendelljoseph',
+                'patrikkozak',
+                'paulpopus',
+                'r1tsuu',
+                'tylandavis',
+              ].includes(context.actor.toLowerCase())
+            ) {
               label = 'created-by: Payload team';
             } else if (association === 'CONTRIBUTOR') {
               label = 'created-by: Contributor';
@@ -47,4 +65,4 @@ jobs:
               repo: context.repo.repo,
               labels: [label],
             });
-            console.log('Added created-by: Payload team label');
+            console.log(`Added '${label}' label`);

.github/workflows/main.yml

@@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ concurrency:
   cancel-in-progress: true
 
 env:
-  NODE_VERSION: 18.20.2
-  PNPM_VERSION: 8.15.7
+  NODE_VERSION: 22.6.0
+  PNPM_VERSION: 9.7.1
   DO_NOT_TRACK: 1 # Disable Turbopack telemetry
   NEXT_TELEMETRY_DISABLED: 1 # Disable Next telemetry
 
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ jobs:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
         with:
           version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
           run_install: false
@@ -120,7 +120,7 @@ jobs:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
         with:
           version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
           run_install: false
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ jobs:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
         with:
           version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
           run_install: false
@@ -196,6 +196,7 @@ jobs:
           - postgres-custom-schema
           - postgres-uuid
           - supabase
+          - sqlite
     env:
       POSTGRES_USER: postgres
       POSTGRES_PASSWORD: postgres
@@ -206,6 +207,9 @@ jobs:
       AWS_REGION: us-east-1
 
     steps:
+      - uses: actions/checkout@v4
+        with:
+          fetch-depth: 25
       # https://github.com/actions/virtual-environments/issues/1187
       - name: tune linux network
         run: sudo ethtool -K eth0 tx off rx off
@@ -216,17 +220,12 @@ jobs:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
         with:
           version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
           run_install: false
 
-      - name: Restore build
-        uses: actions/cache@v4
-        timeout-minutes: 10
-        with:
-          path: ./*
-          key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
+      - run: pnpm install
 
       - name: Start LocalStack
         run: pnpm docker:start
@@ -292,6 +291,7 @@ jobs:
           - access-control
           - admin__e2e__1
           - admin__e2e__2
+          - admin-root
           - auth
           - field-error-states
           - fields-relationship
@@ -310,6 +310,7 @@ jobs:
           - fields__collections__Upload
           - live-preview
           - localization
+          - locked-documents
           - i18n
           - plugin-cloud-storage
           - plugin-form-builder
@@ -330,7 +331,7 @@ jobs:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
         with:
           version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
           run_install: false
@@ -369,7 +370,7 @@ jobs:
         run: pnpm exec playwright install-deps chromium
 
       - name: E2E Tests
-        run: PLAYWRIGHT_JSON_OUTPUT_NAME=results_${{ matrix.suite }}.json pnpm test:e2e ${{ matrix.suite }}
+        run: PLAYWRIGHT_JSON_OUTPUT_NAME=results_${{ matrix.suite }}.json pnpm test:e2e:prod:ci ${{ matrix.suite }}
         env:
           PLAYWRIGHT_JSON_OUTPUT_NAME: results_${{ matrix.suite }}.json
           NEXT_TELEMETRY_DISABLED: 1
@@ -390,6 +391,7 @@ jobs:
       #     job-summary: true
 
   app-build-with-packed:
+    if: false # Disable until package resolution in tgzs can be figured out
     runs-on: ubuntu-latest
     needs: build
 
@@ -404,7 +406,7 @@ jobs:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
         with:
           version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
           run_install: false
@@ -417,15 +419,15 @@ jobs:
           key: ${{ github.sha }}-${{ github.run_number }}
 
       - name: Start MongoDB
-        uses: supercharge/mongodb-github-action@1.10.0
+        uses: supercharge/mongodb-github-action@1.11.0
         with:
           mongodb-version: 6.0
 
       - name: Pack and build app
         run: |
           set -ex
-          pnpm run script:pack --dest templates/blank-3.0
-          cd templates/blank-3.0
+          pnpm run script:pack --dest templates/blank
+          cd templates/blank
           cp .env.example .env
           ls -la
           pnpm add ./*.tgz --ignore-workspace
@@ -448,7 +450,7 @@ jobs:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
         with:
           version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
           run_install: false
@@ -489,7 +491,7 @@ jobs:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Start MongoDB
-        uses: supercharge/mongodb-github-action@1.10.0
+        uses: supercharge/mongodb-github-action@1.11.0
         with:
           mongodb-version: 6.0
 
@@ -517,7 +519,7 @@ jobs:
           node-version: ${{ env.NODE_VERSION }}
 
       - name: Install pnpm
-        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v3
+        uses: pnpm/action-setup@v4
         with:
           version: ${{ env.PNPM_VERSION }}
           run_install: false
@@ -546,3 +548,16 @@ jobs:
     steps:
       - if: ${{ always() && (contains(needs.*.result, 'failure') || contains(needs.*.result, 'cancelled')) }}
         run: exit 1
+
+  publish-canary:
+    name: Publish Canary
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    needs:
+      - all-green
+
+    steps:
+      # debug github.ref output
+      - run: |
+          echo github.ref: ${{ github.ref }}
+          echo isBeta: ${{ github.ref == 'refs/heads/beta' }}
+          echo isMain: ${{ github.ref == 'refs/heads/main' }}

.github/workflows/post-release.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+name: post-release
+
+on:
+  release:
+    types:
+      - published
+  workflow_dispatch:
+
+jobs:
+  post_release:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - uses: actions/checkout@v4
+        with:
+          fetch-depth: 0
+          # Only needed if debugging on a branch other than default
+          # ref: ${{ github.event.release.target_commitish || github.ref }}
+      - uses: ./.github/actions/release-commenter
+        continue-on-error: true
+        env:
+          ACTIONS_STEP_DEBUG: true
+        with:
+          GITHUB_TOKEN: ${{ secrets.GITHUB_TOKEN }}
+          tag-filter: 'v\d'
+
+          # Change to blank to disable commenting
+          # comment-template: ''
+
+          comment-template: |
+            🚀 This is included in version {release_link}

.github/workflows/pr-title.yml

@@ -38,6 +38,9 @@ jobs:
             db-\*
             db-mongodb
             db-postgres
+            db-vercel-postgres
+            db-sqlite
+            drizzle
             email-nodemailer
             eslint
             graphql
@@ -50,7 +53,6 @@ jobs:
             plugin-form-builder
             plugin-nested-docs
             plugin-redirects
-            plugin-relationship-object-ids
             plugin-search
             plugin-sentry
             plugin-seo
@@ -61,6 +63,7 @@ jobs:
             storage-\*
             storage-azure
             storage-gcs
+            storage-uploadthing
             storage-vercel-blob
             storage-s3
             translations
@@ -101,3 +104,19 @@ jobs:
         with:
           header: pr-title-lint-error
           delete: true
+
+  label-pr-on-open:
+    name: label-pr-on-open
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    if: github.event.action == 'opened'
+    steps:
+      - name: Tag with main branch with v2
+        if: github.event.pull_request.base.ref == 'main'
+        uses: actions-ecosystem/action-add-labels@v1
+        with:
+          labels: v2
+      - name: Tag with beta branch with v3
+        if: github.event.pull_request.base.ref == 'beta'
+        uses: actions-ecosystem/action-add-labels@v1
+        with:
+          labels: v3

.github/workflows/release-canary.yml

@@ -6,8 +6,8 @@ on:
       - beta
 
 env:
-  NODE_VERSION: 18.20.2
-  PNPM_VERSION: 8.15.7
+  NODE_VERSION: 22.6.0
+  PNPM_VERSION: 9.7.1
   DO_NOT_TRACK: 1 # Disable Turbopack telemetry
   NEXT_TELEMETRY_DISABLED: 1 # Disable Next telemetry
 

.gitignore

@@ -5,6 +5,10 @@ dist
 !/.idea/runConfigurations
 !/.idea/payload.iml
 
+# Custom actions
+!.github/actions/**/dist
+
+test/packed
 test-results
 .devcontainer
 .localstack
@@ -22,6 +26,10 @@ meta_shared.json
 # Ignore test directory media folder/files
 /media
 test/media
+*payloadtests.db
+*payloadtests.db-journal
+*payloadtests.db-shm
+*payloadtests.db-wal
 /versions
 
 # Created by https://www.toptal.com/developers/gitignore/api/node,macos,windows,webstorm,sublimetext,visualstudiocode
@@ -149,6 +157,7 @@ out
 # Nuxt.js build / generate output
 .nuxt
 dist
+dist_optimized
 
 # Gatsby files
 .cache/
@@ -296,3 +305,12 @@ $RECYCLE.BIN/
 
 /build
 .swc
+app/(payload)/admin/importMap.js
+test/live-preview/app/(payload)/admin/importMap.js
+/test/live-preview/app/(payload)/admin/importMap.js
+test/admin-root/app/(payload)/admin/importMap.js
+/test/admin-root/app/(payload)/admin/importMap.js
+test/app/(payload)/admin/importMap.js
+/test/app/(payload)/admin/importMap.js
+test/pnpm-lock.yaml
+test/databaseAdapter.js

.idea/payload.iml

@@ -26,6 +26,7 @@
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/live-preview/dist" />
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/next/.swc" />
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/next/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/next/dist" />
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/payload/fields" />
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/plugin-cloud-storage/.turbo" />
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/plugin-cloud-storage/dist" />
@@ -75,8 +76,12 @@
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/ui/.swc" />
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/ui/.turbo" />
       <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/ui/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/drizzle/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/drizzle/dist" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/db-sqlite/.turbo" />
+      <excludeFolder url="file://$MODULE_DIR$/packages/db-sqlite/dist" />
     </content>
     <orderEntry type="inheritedJdk" />
     <orderEntry type="sourceFolder" forTests="false" />
   </component>
-</module>
+</module>

.idea/runConfigurations/Run_Dev_Fields.xml

@@ -1,8 +1,13 @@
 <component name="ProjectRunConfigurationManager">
-  <configuration default="false" name="Run Dev Fields" type="NodeJSConfigurationType" application-parameters="--no-deprecation fields" path-to-js-file="test/dev.js" working-dir="$PROJECT_DIR$">
-    <envs>
-      <env name="NODE_OPTIONS" value="--no-deprecation" />
-    </envs>
+  <configuration default="false" name="Run Dev Fields" type="js.build_tools.npm">
+    <package-json value="$PROJECT_DIR$/package.json" />
+    <command value="run" />
+    <scripts>
+      <script value="dev" />
+    </scripts>
+    <arguments value="fields" />
+    <node-interpreter value="project" />
+    <envs />
     <method v="2" />
   </configuration>
 </component>

.idea/runConfigurations/Run_Dev__community.xml

@@ -1,8 +1,13 @@
 <component name="ProjectRunConfigurationManager">
-  <configuration default="false" name="Run Dev _community" type="NodeJSConfigurationType" application-parameters="--no-deprecation _community" path-to-js-file="test/dev.js" working-dir="$PROJECT_DIR$">
-    <envs>
-      <env name="NODE_OPTIONS" value="--no-deprecation" />
-    </envs>
+  <configuration default="false" name="Run Dev _community" type="js.build_tools.npm">
+    <package-json value="$PROJECT_DIR$/package.json" />
+    <command value="run" />
+    <scripts>
+      <script value="dev" />
+    </scripts>
+    <arguments value="_community" />
+    <node-interpreter value="project" />
+    <envs />
     <method v="2" />
   </configuration>
 </component>

.idea/runConfigurations/Run_Dev_admin.xml

@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+<component name="ProjectRunConfigurationManager">
+  <configuration default="false" name="Run Dev admin" type="js.build_tools.npm">
+    <package-json value="$PROJECT_DIR$/package.json" />
+    <command value="run" />
+    <scripts>
+      <script value="dev" />
+    </scripts>
+    <arguments value="admin" />
+    <node-interpreter value="project" />
+    <envs />
+    <method v="2" />
+  </configuration>
+</component>

.idea/runConfigurations/_template__of_JavaScriptTestRunnerJest.xml

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 <component name="ProjectRunConfigurationManager">
   <configuration default="true" type="JavaScriptTestRunnerJest">
     <node-interpreter value="project" />
-    <node-options value="--experimental-vm-modules --no-deprecation" />
+    <node-options value="--no-deprecation" />
     <envs />
     <scope-kind value="ALL" />
     <method v="2" />

.node-version

@@ -1 +1 @@
-v18.20.2
+v22.6.0

.npmrc

@@ -1,2 +1,3 @@
 symlink=true
-node-linker=isolated # due to a typescript bug, isolated mode requires @types/express-serve-static-core, terser and monaco-editor to be installed https://github.com/microsoft/TypeScript/issues/47663#issuecomment-1519138189 along with two other changes in the code which I've marked with (tsbugisolatedmode) in the code
+node-linker=isolated
+hoist-workspace-packages=false # the default in pnpm v9 is true, but that can break our runtime dependency checks

.nvmrc

@@ -1 +1 @@
-v18.20.2
+v22.6.0

.tool-versions

@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+pnpm 9.7.1
+nodejs 22.6.0

.vscode/launch.json

@@ -56,6 +56,20 @@
       "request": "launch",
       "type": "node-terminal"
     },
+    {
+      "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js fields-relationship",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Run Dev Fields-Relationship",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal"
+    },
+    {
+      "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js login-with-username",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Run Dev Login-With-Username",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal"
+    },
     {
       "command": "pnpm run dev plugin-cloud-storage",
       "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
@@ -104,6 +118,13 @@
       "request": "launch",
       "type": "node-terminal"
     },
+    {
+      "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js locked-documents",
+      "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",
+      "name": "Run Dev Locked Documents",
+      "request": "launch",
+      "type": "node-terminal"
+    },
     {
       "command": "node --no-deprecation test/dev.js uploads",
       "cwd": "${workspaceFolder}",

.vscode/settings.json

@@ -31,8 +31,15 @@
     "editor.formatOnSave": true
   },
   "editor.formatOnSaveMode": "file",
-  // All ESLint rules to 'warn' to differentate from TypeScript's 'error' level
-  "eslint.rules.customizations": [{ "rule": "*", "severity": "warn" }],
+  "eslint.rules.customizations": [
+    // Defaultt all ESLint errors to 'warn' to differentate from TypeScript's 'error' level
+    { "rule": "*", "severity": "warn" },
+
+    // Silence some warnings that will get auto-fixed
+    { "rule": "perfectionist/*", "severity": "off", "fixable": true },
+    { "rule": "curly", "severity": "off", "fixable": true },
+    { "rule": "object-shorthand", "severity": "off", "fixable": true }
+  ],
   "typescript.tsdk": "node_modules/typescript/lib",
   // Load .git-blame-ignore-revs file
   "gitlens.advanced.blame.customArguments": ["--ignore-revs-file", ".git-blame-ignore-revs"],
@@ -42,8 +49,8 @@
     }
   },
   "files.insertFinalNewline": true,
-  "jestrunner.jestCommand": "pnpm exec cross-env NODE_OPTIONS=\"--experimental-vm-modules --no-deprecation\" node 'node_modules/jest/bin/jest.js'",
+  "jestrunner.jestCommand": "pnpm exec cross-env NODE_OPTIONS=\"--no-deprecation\" node 'node_modules/jest/bin/jest.js'",
   "jestrunner.debugOptions": {
-    "runtimeArgs": ["--experimental-vm-modules", "--no-deprecation"]
+    "runtimeArgs": ["--no-deprecation"]
   }
 }

CONTRIBUTING.md

@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Each test directory is split up in this way specifically to reduce friction when
 
 The following command will start Payload with your config: `pnpm dev my-test-dir`. Example: `pnpm dev fields` for the test/`fields` test suite. This command will start up Payload using your config and refresh a test database on every restart. If you're using VS Code, the most common run configs are automatically added to your editor - you should be able to find them in your VS Code launch tab.
 
-By default, payload will [automatically log you in](https://payloadcms.com/docs/authentication/config#admin-autologin) with the default credentials. To disable that, you can either pass in the --no-auto-login flag (example: `pnpm dev my-test-dir --no-auto-login`) or set the `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_DISABLE_AUTO_LOGIN` environment variable to `false`.
+By default, payload will [automatically log you in](https://payloadcms.com/docs/authentication/overview#admin-autologin) with the default credentials. To disable that, you can either pass in the --no-auto-login flag (example: `pnpm dev my-test-dir --no-auto-login`) or set the `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_DISABLE_AUTO_LOGIN` environment variable to `false`.
 
 The default credentials are `dev@payloadcms.com` as E-Mail and `test` as password. These are used in the auto-login.
 
@@ -120,5 +120,5 @@ This is how you can preview changes you made locally to the docs:
 2. Run `yarn install`
 3. Duplicate the `.env.example` file and rename it to `.env`
 4. Add a `DOCS_DIR` environment variable to the `.env` file which points to the absolute path of your modified docs folder. For example `DOCS_DIR=/Users/yourname/Documents/GitHub/payload/docs`
-5. Run `yarn run fetchDocs:local`. If this was successful, you should see no error messages and the following output: *Docs successfully written to /.../website/src/app/docs.json*. There could be error messages if you have incorrect markdown in your local docs folder. In this case, it will tell you how you can fix it
+5. Run `yarn run fetchDocs:local`. If this was successful, you should see no error messages and the following output: _Docs successfully written to /.../website/src/app/docs.json_. There could be error messages if you have incorrect markdown in your local docs folder. In this case, it will tell you how you can fix it
 6. You're done! Now you can start the website locally using `yarn run dev` and preview the docs under [http://localhost:3000/docs/](http://localhost:3000/docs/)

README.md

@@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
 <a href="https://payloadcms.com"><img width="100%" src="https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/blob/main/packages/payload/src/admin/assets/images/github-banner-alt.jpg?raw=true" alt="Payload headless CMS Admin panel built with React" /></a>
 <br />
 <br />
+
 <p align="left">
   <a href="https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/actions"><img alt="GitHub Workflow Status" src="https://img.shields.io/github/actions/workflow/status/payloadcms/payload/main.yml?style=flat-square"></a>
   &nbsp;

app/(app)/layout.tsx

@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+import React from 'react'
+
+export const metadata = {
+  description: 'Generated by Next.js',
+  title: 'Next.js',
+}
+
+export default function RootLayout({ children }: { children: React.ReactNode }) {
+  return (
+    <html lang="en">
+      <body>{children}</body>
+    </html>
+  )
+}

app/(app)/test/page.tsx

@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+import configPromise from '@payload-config'
+import { getPayloadHMR } from '@payloadcms/next/utilities'
+
+export const Page = async ({ params, searchParams }) => {
+  const payload = await getPayloadHMR({
+    config: configPromise,
+  })
+  return <div>test ${payload?.config?.collections?.length}</div>
+}
+
+export default Page

app/(payload)/admin/[[...segments]]/not-found.tsx

@@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ import config from '@payload-config'
 /* DO NOT MODIFY IT BECAUSE IT COULD BE REWRITTEN AT ANY TIME. */
 import { NotFoundPage, generatePageMetadata } from '@payloadcms/next/views'
 
+import { importMap } from '../importMap.js'
+
 type Args = {
   params: {
     segments: string[]
@@ -17,6 +19,7 @@ type Args = {
 export const generateMetadata = ({ params, searchParams }: Args): Promise<Metadata> =>
   generatePageMetadata({ config, params, searchParams })
 
-const NotFound = ({ params, searchParams }: Args) => NotFoundPage({ config, params, searchParams })
+const NotFound = ({ params, searchParams }: Args) =>
+  NotFoundPage({ config, importMap, params, searchParams })
 
 export default NotFound

app/(payload)/admin/[[...segments]]/page.tsx

@@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ import config from '@payload-config'
 /* DO NOT MODIFY IT BECAUSE IT COULD BE REWRITTEN AT ANY TIME. */
 import { RootPage, generatePageMetadata } from '@payloadcms/next/views'
 
+import { importMap } from '../importMap.js'
+
 type Args = {
   params: {
     segments: string[]
@@ -17,6 +19,7 @@ type Args = {
 export const generateMetadata = ({ params, searchParams }: Args): Promise<Metadata> =>
   generatePageMetadata({ config, params, searchParams })
 
-const Page = ({ params, searchParams }: Args) => RootPage({ config, params, searchParams })
+const Page = ({ params, searchParams }: Args) =>
+  RootPage({ config, importMap, params, searchParams })
 
 export default Page

app/(payload)/layout.tsx

@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
 /* THIS FILE WAS GENERATED AUTOMATICALLY BY PAYLOAD. */
 import configPromise from '@payload-config'
 import { RootLayout } from '@payloadcms/next/layouts'
+
+import { importMap } from './admin/importMap.js'
+
 // import '@payloadcms/ui/styles.css' // Uncomment this line if `@payloadcms/ui` in `tsconfig.json` points to `/ui/dist` instead of `/ui/src`
 /* DO NOT MODIFY IT BECAUSE IT COULD BE REWRITTEN AT ANY TIME. */
 import React from 'react'
@@ -11,6 +14,10 @@ type Args = {
   children: React.ReactNode
 }
 
-const Layout = ({ children }: Args) => <RootLayout config={configPromise}>{children}</RootLayout>
+const Layout = ({ children }: Args) => (
+  <RootLayout config={configPromise} importMap={importMap}>
+    {children}
+  </RootLayout>
+)
 
 export default Layout

docs/access-control/collections.mdx

@@ -6,96 +6,140 @@ desc: With Collection-level Access Control you can define which users can create
 keywords: collections, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-You can define Collection-level Access Control within each Collection's `access` property. All Access Control functions accept one `args` argument.
+Collection Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to Documents within a [Collection](../collections/overview), as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as it relates to that Collection.
 
-## Available Controls
-
-| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                         |
-| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------- |
-| **[`create`](#create)** | Used in the `create` operation               |
-| **[`read`](#read)**     | Used in the `find` and `findByID` operations |
-| **[`update`](#update)** | Used in the `update` operation               |
-| **[`delete`](#delete)** | Used in the `delete` operation               |
-
-#### Auth-enabled Controls
-
-If a Collection supports [`Authentication`](/docs/authentication/overview), the following Access Controls become available:
-
-| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                                           |
-| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **[`admin`](#admin)**   | Used to restrict access to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview)             |
-| **[`unlock`](#unlock)** | Used to restrict which users can access the `unlock` operation |
-
-**Example Collection config:**
+To add Access Control to a Collection, use the `access` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
 
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: "posts",
+export const CollectionWithAccessControl: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+Access Control is specific to the operation of the request.
+
+To add Access Control to a Collection, use the `access` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
+
+export const CollectionWithAccessControl: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
   // highlight-start
   access: {
-    create: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
-    read: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
-    update: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
-    delete: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
-    admin: ({ req: { user } }) => { ... },
+    create: () => {...},
+    read: () => {...},
+    update: () => {...},
+    delete: () => {...},
+
+    // Auth-enabled Collections only
+    admin: () => {...},
+    unlock: () => {...},
+
+    // Version-enabled Collections only
+    readVersions: () => {...},
   },
   // highlight-end
-};
+}
 ```
 
+The following options are available:
+
+| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                         |
+| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------- |
+| **`create`** | Used in the `create` operation. [More details](#create). |
+| **`read`**     | Used in the `find` and `findByID` operations. [More details](#read). |
+| **`update`** | Used in the `update` operation. [More details](#update). |
+| **`delete`** | Used in the `delete` operation. [More details](#delete). |
+
+If a Collection supports [`Authentication`](../authentication/overview), the following additional options are available:
+
+| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                                           |
+| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`admin`**   | Used to restrict access to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). [More details](#admin). |
+| **`unlock`** | Used to restrict which users can access the `unlock` operation. [More details](#unlock). |
+
+If a Collection supports [Versions](../versions/overview), the following additional options are available:
+
+| Function           | Allows/Denies Access                                                                                                   |
+| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`readVersions`** | Used to control who can read versions, and who can't. Will automatically restrict the Admin UI version viewing access. [More details](#read-versions). |
+
 ### Create
 
 Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `create` request.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
-
-| Option     | Description                                                                                                                  |
-| ---------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
-| **`data`** | The data passed to create the document with.                                                                                 |
-
-**Example:**
+To add create Access Control to a Collection, use the `create` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
 ```ts
-const PublicUsers = {
-  slug: 'public-users',
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionWithCreateAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
   access: {
     // highlight-start
-    // allow guest users to self-registration
-    create: () => true,
+    create: ({ req: { user }, data }) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
     // highlight-end
-    ...
   },
-  fields: [ ... ],
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `create` function:
+
+| Option     | Description                                                                                                                  |
+| ---------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+| **`data`** | The data passed to create the document with.                                                                                 |
+
 ### Read
 
-Read access functions can return a boolean result or optionally return a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) which limits the documents that are returned to only those that match the constraint you provide. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to only certain documents however you specify.
+Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `read` request.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add read Access Control to a Collection, use the `read` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
-| Option    | Description                                                                |
-| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
-| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested, if within `findByID`                           |
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
-**Example:**
+export const CollectionWithReadAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Return a [Query](../queries/overview) to limit the Documents to only those that match the constraint. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to specific Documents. [More details](../queries/overview).
+</Banner>
+
+As your application becomes more complex, you may want to define your function in a separate file and import them into your Collection Config:
 
 ```ts
 import type { Access } from 'payload'
 
-const canReadPage: Access = ({ req: { user } }) => {
-  // allow authenticated users
+export const canReadPage: Access = ({ req: { user } }) => {
+  // Allow authenticated users
   if (user) {
     return true
   }
-  // using a query constraint, guest users can access when a field named 'isPublic' is set to true
+
+  // By returning a Query, guest users can read public Documents
+  // Note: this assumes you have a `isPublic` checkbox field on your Collection
   return {
-    // assumes we have a checkbox field named 'isPublic'
     isPublic: {
       equals: true,
     },
@@ -103,55 +147,96 @@ const canReadPage: Access = ({ req: { user } }) => {
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `read` function:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                |
+| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested, if within `findByID`.                           |
+
 ### Update
 
-Update access functions can return a boolean result or optionally return a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) to limit the document(s) that can be updated by the currently authenticated user. For example, returning a `query` from the `update` Access Control is helpful in cases where you would like to restrict a user to only being able to update the documents containing a `createdBy` relationship field equal to the user's ID.
+Returns a boolean which allows/denies access to the `update` request.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add update Access Control to a Collection, use the `update` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
-| Option     | Description                                                                |
-| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
-| **`id`**   | `id` of document requested to update                                       |
-| **`data`** | The data passed to update the document with                                |
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
-**Example:**
+export const CollectionWithUpdateAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    update: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Return a [Query](../queries/overview) to limit the Documents to only those that match the constraint. This can be helpful to restrict users' access to specific Documents. [More details](../queries/overview).
+</Banner>
+
+As your application becomes more complex, you may want to define your function in a separate file and import them into your Collection Config:
 
 ```ts
 import type { Access } from 'payload'
 
-const canUpdateUser: Access = ({ req: { user }, id }) => {
-  // allow users with a role of 'admin'
+export const canUpdateUser: Access = ({ req: { user }, id }) => {
+  // Allow users with a role of 'admin'
   if (user.roles && user.roles.some((role) => role === 'admin')) {
     return true
   }
+
   // allow any other users to update only oneself
   return user.id === id
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `update` function:
+
+| Option     | Description                                                                |
+| ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+| **`id`**   | `id` of document requested to update.                                       |
+| **`data`** | The data passed to update the document with.                                |
+
 ### Delete
 
 Similarly to the Update function, returns a boolean or a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) to limit which documents can be deleted by which users.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add delete Access Control to a Collection, use the `delete` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
 
-| Option    | Description                                                                                         |
-| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object with additional `user` property, which is the currently logged in user |
-| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested to delete                                                                |
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
-**Example:**
+export const CollectionWithDeleteAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    delete: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+As your application becomes more complex, you may want to define your function in a separate file and import them into your Collection Config:
 
 ```ts
 import type { Access } from 'payload'
 
-const canDeleteCustomer: Access = async ({ req, id }) => {
+export const canDeleteCustomer: Access = async ({ req, id }) => {
   if (!id) {
-    // allow the admin UI to show controls to delete since it is indeterminate without the id
+    // allow the admin UI to show controls to delete since it is indeterminate without the `id`
     return true
   }
-  // query another collection using the id
+
+  // Query another Collection using the `id`
   const result = await req.payload.find({
     collection: 'contracts',
     limit: 0,
@@ -165,22 +250,90 @@ const canDeleteCustomer: Access = async ({ req, id }) => {
 }
 ```
 
+The following arguments are provided to the `delete` function:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                                         |
+| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object with additional `user` property, which is the currently logged in user. |
+| **`id`**  | `id` of document requested to delete.
+
 ### Admin
 
 If the Collection is use to access the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection), the `Admin` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the admin UI.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add Admin Access Control to a Collection, use the `admin` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionWithAdminAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    admin: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `admin` function:
 
 | Option    | Description                                                                |
 | --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
 
 ### Unlock
 
-Determines which users can [unlock](/docs/authentication/operations#unlock) other users who may be blocked from authenticating successfully due to [failing too many login attempts](/docs/authentication/config#options).
+Determines which users can [unlock](/docs/authentication/operations#unlock) other users who may be blocked from authenticating successfully due to [failing too many login attempts](/docs/authentication/overview#options).
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add Unlock Access Control to a Collection, use the `unlock` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionWithUnlockAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    unlock: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `unlock` function:
 
 | Option    | Description                                                                |
 | --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
+
+### Read Versions
+
+If the Collection has [Versions](../versions/overview) enabled, the `readVersions` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the version history of a Document.
+
+To add Read Versions Access Control to a Collection, use the `readVersions` property in the [Collection Config](../collections/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const CollectionWithVersionsAccess: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    readVersions: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `readVersions` function:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                |
+| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |

docs/access-control/fields.mdx

@@ -1,22 +1,36 @@
 ---
 title: Field-level Access Control
 label: Fields
-order: 30
+order: 40
 desc: Field-level Access Control is specified within a field's config, and allows you to define which users can create, read or update Fields.
 keywords: fields, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Field Access Control is specified with functions inside a field's config. All field-level Controls return a boolean value to allow or deny access for the specified operation. No field-level Access Controls support returning query constraints. All Access Control functions accept one `args` argument.
+Field Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to specific [Fields](../fields/overview) within a Document.
 
-## Available Controls
+To add Access Control to a Field, use the `access` property in your [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
-| Function                | Purpose                                                                          |
-| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **[`create`](#create)** | Allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when creating a new document |
-| **[`read`](#read)**     | Allows or denies the ability to read a field's value                             |
-| **[`update`](#update)** | Allows or denies the ability to update a field's value                           |
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload';
 
-**Example Collection config:**
+export const FieldWithAccessControl: Field = {
+  // ...
+  access: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  Field Access Controls does not support returning [Query](../queries/overview) constraints like [Collection Access Control](./collections) does.
+</Banner>
+
+## Config Options
+
+Access Control is specific to the operation of the request.
+
+To add Access Control to a Field, use the `access` property in the [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload';
@@ -39,6 +53,14 @@ export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
 };
 ```
 
+The following options are available:
+
+| Function                | Purpose                                                                          |
+| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`create`** | Allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when creating a new document. [More details](#create). |
+| **`read`**     | Allows or denies the ability to read a field's value. [More details](#read).       |
+| **`update`** | Allows or denies the ability to update a field's value [More details](#update).    |
+
 ### Create
 
 Returns a boolean which allows or denies the ability to set a field's value when creating a new document. If `false` is returned, any passed values will be discarded.

docs/access-control/globals.mdx

@@ -1,35 +1,44 @@
 ---
 title: Globals Access Control
 label: Globals
-order: 40
+order: 30
 desc: Global-level Access Control is specified within each Global's `access` property and allows you to define which users can read or update Globals.
 keywords: globals, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-You can define Global-level Access Control within each Global's `access` property. All Access Control functions accept one `args` argument.
+Global Access Control is [Access Control](../access-control) used to restrict access to [Global](../globals/overview) Documents, as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) as it relates to that Global.
 
-## Available Controls
+To add Access Control to a Global, use the `access` property in your [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
 
-| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                   |
-| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------- |
-| **[`read`](#read)**     | Used in the `findOne` Global operation |
-| **[`update`](#update)** | Used in the `update` Global operation  |
+```ts
+import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload';
 
-**Example Global config:**
+export const GlobalWithAccessControl: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+Access Control is specific to the operation of the request.
+
+To add Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `access` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
 
-const Header: GlobalConfig = {
-  slug: 'header',
+const GlobalWithAccessControl: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
   // highlight-start
   access: {
-    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {
-      /* */
-    },
-    update: ({ req: { user } }) => {
-      /* */
-    },
+    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {...},
+    update: ({ req: { user } }) => {...},
+
+    // Version-enabled Globals only
+    readVersion: () => {...},
   },
   // highlight-end
 }
@@ -37,23 +46,97 @@ const Header: GlobalConfig = {
 export default Header
 ```
 
+The following options are available:
+
+| Function                | Allows/Denies Access                   |
+| ----------------------- | -------------------------------------- |
+| **`read`**     | Used in the `findOne` Global operation. [More details](#read). |
+| **`update`** | Used in the `update` Global operation. [More details](#update). |
+
+If a Global supports [Versions](../versions/overview), the following additional options are available:
+
+| Function           | Allows/Denies Access                                                                                                   |
+| ------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`readVersions`** | Used to control who can read versions, and who can't. Will automatically restrict the Admin UI version viewing access. [More details](#read-versions). |
+
 ### Read
 
-Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) which limits who can read this global based on its current properties.
+Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](../queries/overview) which limits who can read this global based on its current properties.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add read Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `read` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const Header: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  read: {
+    read: ({ req: { user } }) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `read` function:
 
 | Option    | Description                                                                |
 | --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
 
 ### Update
 
-Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](/docs/queries/overview) which limits who can update this global based on its current properties.
+Returns a boolean result or optionally a [query constraint](../queries/overview) which limits who can update this global based on its current properties.
 
-**Available argument properties:**
+To add update Access Control to a [Global](../configuration/globals), use the `access` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const Header: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  access: {
+    update: ({ req: { user }, data }) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `update` function:
 
 | Option     | Description                                                                |
 | ---------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user` |
+| **`req`**  | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |
 | **`data`** | The data passed to update the global with.                                 |
+
+### Read Versions
+
+If the Global has [Versions](../versions/overview) enabled, the `readVersions` Access Control function determines whether or not the currently logged in user can access the version history of a Document.
+
+To add Read Versions Access Control to a Collection, use the `readVersions` property in the [Global Config](../globals/overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const GlobalWithVersionsAccess: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  access: {
+    // highlight-start
+    readVersions: ({ req: { user }}) => {
+      return Boolean(user)
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are provided to the `readVersions` function:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                |
+| --------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`req`** | The [Request](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/Request) object containing the currently authenticated `user`. |

docs/access-control/overview.mdx

@@ -2,84 +2,59 @@
 title: Access Control
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: Payload makes it simple to define and manage access control. By declaring roles, you can set permissions and restrict what your users can interact with.
+desc: Payload makes it simple to define and manage Access Control. By declaring roles, you can set permissions and restrict what your users can interact with.
 keywords: overview, access control, permissions, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Access control within Payload is extremely powerful while remaining easy and intuitive to manage. Declaring who should have access to what documents is no more complex than writing a simple JavaScript function that either returns a `boolean` or a [`query`](/docs/queries/overview) constraint to restrict which documents users can interact with.
-
 <YouTube id="DoPLyXG26Dg" title="Overview of Payload Access Control" />
 
-**Example use cases:**
+Access Control determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Document, as well as what they can and cannot see within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). By implementing Access Control, you can define granular restrictions based on the user, their roles (RBAC), Document data, or any other criteria your application requires.
 
-- Allowing anyone `read` access to all `Post`s
-- Only allowing public access to `Post`s where a `status` field is equal to `published`
-- Giving only `User`s with a `role` field equal to `admin` the ability to delete `Page`(s)
-- Allowing anyone to create `ContactSubmission`s, but only logged in users to `read`, `update` or `delete` them
-- Restricting a `User` to only be able to see their own `Order`(s), but no others
-- Allowing `User`s that belong to a certain `Organization` to access only that `Organization`'s `Resource`s
+Access Control functions are scoped to the _operation_, meaning you can have different rules for `create`, `read`, `update`, `delete`, etc. Access Control functions are executed _before_ any changes are made and _before_ any operations are completed. This allows you to determine if the user has the necessary permissions before fulfilling the request.
 
-## Default Settings
+There are many use cases for Access Control, including:
 
-**By default, all Collections and Globals require that a user is logged in to be able to interact in any way.** The default Access Control function evaluates the `user` from the `req` and returns `true` if a user is logged in, and `false` if not.
+- Allowing anyone `read` access to all posts
+- Only allowing public access to posts where a `status` field is equal to `published`
+- Giving only users with a `role` field equal to `admin` the ability to delete posts
+- Allowing anyone to submit contact forms, but only logged in users to `read`, `update` or `delete` them
+- Restricting a user to only be able to see their own orders, but noone else's
+- Allowing users that belong to a certain organization to access only that organization's resources
 
-**Default Access function:**
+There are three main types of Access Control in Payload:
+
+- [Collection Access Control](./collections)
+- [Global Access Control](./globals)
+- [Field Access Control](./fields)
+
+## Default Access Control
+
+Payload provides default Access Control so that your data is secured behind [Authentication](../authentication) without additional configuration. To do this, Payload sets a default function that simply checks if a user is present on the request. You can override this default behavior by defining your own Access Control functions as needed.
+
+Here is the default Access Control that Payload provides:
 
 ```ts
 const defaultPayloadAccess = ({ req: { user } }) => {
   // Return `true` if a user is found
   // and `false` if it is undefined or null
-  return Boolean(user)
+  return Boolean(user) // highlight-line
 }
 ```
 
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  In the Local API, all Access Control functions are skipped by default, allowing your server to do
-  whatever it needs. But, you can opt back in by setting the option
-  <strong>
-    overrideAccess
-  </strong>
-  {' '}
-  to <strong>false</strong>.
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  In the [Local API](../local-api/overview), all Access Control is _skipped_ by default. This allows your server to have full control over your application. To opt back in, you can set the `overrideAccess` option to `false` in your requests.
 </Banner>
 
-## Access Control Types
+## The Access Operation
 
-You can manage access within Payload on three different levels:
+The Admin Panel responds dynamically to your changes to Access Control. For example, if you restrict editing `ExampleCollection` to only users that feature an "admin" role, Payload will **hide** that Collection from the Admin Panel entirely. This is super powerful and allows you to control who can do what within your Admin Panel using the same functions that secure your APIs.
 
-- [Collections](/docs/access-control/collections)
-- [Fields](/docs/access-control/fields)
-- [Globals](/docs/access-control/globals)
-
-## When Access Control is Executed
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  Access control functions are utilized in two places. It's important to understand how and when
-  your access control is executed.
-</Banner>
-
-### As you execute operations
-
-When you perform Payload operations like `create`, `read`, `update`, and `delete`, your access control functions will be executed before any changes or operations are completed.
-
-### Within the Admin UI
-
-The Payload Admin UI responds dynamically to the access control that you define. For example, if you restrict editing a `ExampleCollection` to only users that feature a `role` of `admin`, the Payload Admin UI will **hide** the `ExampleCollection` from the Admin UI entirely. This is super powerful and allows you to control who can do what with your Admin UI.
-
-To accomplish this, Payload ships with an `Access` operation, which is executed when a user logs into the Admin UI. Payload will execute each one of your access control functions, across all collections, globals, and fields, at the top level and return a response that contains a reflection of what the currently authenticated user can do with your application.
-
-## Argument Availability
+To accomplish this, Payload exposes the [Access Operation](../authentication/operations#access). Upon login, Payload executes each Access Control function at the top level, across all Collections, Globals, and Fields, and returns a response that contains a reflection of what the currently authenticated user can do within your application.
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  When your access control functions are executed via the <strong>access</strong> operation, the{' '}
-  <strong>id</strong> and <strong>data</strong> arguments will be <strong>undefined</strong>,
-  because Payload is executing your functions without referencing a specific document.
+  When your access control functions are executed via the [Access Operation](../authentication/operations#access),  the `id` and `data` arguments will be `undefined`. This is because Payload is executing your functions without referencing a specific Document.
 </Banner>
 
-If you use `id` or `data` within your access control functions, make sure to check that they are defined first. If they are not, then you can assume that your access control is being executed via the `access` operation, to determine solely what the user can do within the Admin UI.
+If you use `id` or `data` within your access control functions, make sure to check that they are defined first. If they are not, then you can assume that your Access Control is being executed via the Access Operation to determine solely what the user can do within the Admin Panel.

docs/admin/collections.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,173 @@
+---
+title: Collection Admin Config
+label: Collections
+order: 20
+desc:
+keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+The behavior of [Collections](../configuration/collections) within the [Admin Panel](./overview) can be fully customized to fit the needs of your application. This includes grouping or hiding their navigation links, adding [Custom Components](./components), selecting which fields to display in the List View, and more.
+
+To configure Admin Options for Collections, use the `admin` property in your Collection Config:
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Admin Options
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option                       | Description                                                                                                                                                                                           |
+| ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`group`**                      | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                                                                                             |
+| **`hidden`**                     | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Collection from navigation and admin routing.                                                                 |
+| **`hooks`**                      | Admin-specific hooks for this Collection. [More details](../hooks/collections).                                                                                                                                        |
+| **`useAsTitle`**                 | Specify a top-level field to use for a document title throughout the Admin Panel. If no field is defined, the ID of the document is used as the title.                                                |
+| **`description`**                | Text to display below the Collection label in the List View to give editors more information. Alternatively, you can use the `admin.components.Description` to render a React component. [More details](#components). |
+| **`defaultColumns`**             | Array of field names that correspond to which columns to show by default in this Collection's List View.                                                                                              |
+| **`hideAPIURL`**                 | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this Collection.                                                                                                                        |
+| **`enableRichTextLink`**         | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Link` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default.         |
+| **`enableRichTextRelationship`** | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Relationship` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default. |
+| **`meta`**                       | Page metadata overrides to apply to this Collection within the Admin Panel. [More details](./metadata).                                                                           |
+| **`preview`**                    | Function to generate preview URLs within the Admin Panel that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).                                                                                                |
+| **`livePreview`**                | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                                                              |
+| **`components`**                 | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Collection. [More details](#components).                                                                                       |
+| **`listSearchableFields`**       | Specify which fields should be searched in the List search view. [More details](#list-searchable-fields).                                                                                                      |
+| **`pagination`**             | Set pagination-specific options for this Collection. [More details](#pagination).                                                                                                                              |
+
+### Components
+
+Collections can set their own [Custom Components](./components) which only apply to [Collection](../configuration/collections)-specific UI within the [Admin Panel](./overview). This includes elements such as the Save Button, or entire layouts such as the Edit View.
+
+To override Collection Components, use the `admin.components` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyCollection: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    components: { // highlight-line
+      // ...
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Path                       | Description                                                                                                            |
+| -------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`beforeList`**           | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View                                                          |
+| **`beforeListTable`**      | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View's table                                                  |
+| **`afterList`**            | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View                                                           |
+| **`afterListTable`**       | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View's table
+| **`Description`**          | A component to render below the Collection label in the List View. An alternative to the `admin.description` property. |
+| **`edit.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default Save Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be disabled.                                     |
+| **`edit.SaveDraftButton`** | Replace the default Save Draft Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled and autosave must be disabled. |
+| **`edit.PublishButton`**   | Replace the default Publish Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled.                                  |
+| **`edit.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default Preview Button with a Custom Component. [Preview](#preview) must be enabled.                                         |
+| **`views`**                | Override or create new views within the Admin Panel. [More details](./views).                                     |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components).
+</Banner>
+
+### Preview
+
+It is possible to display a Preview Button within the Edit View of the Admin Panel. This will allow editors to visit the frontend of your app the corresponds to the document they are actively editing. This way they can preview the latest, potentially unpublished changes.
+
+To configure the Preview Button, set the `admin.preview` property to a function in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
+      if (doc?.slug) {
+        return `/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
+      }
+
+      return null
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The preview function receives two arguments:
+
+| Argument | Description |
+| --- | --- |
+| **`doc`** | The Document being edited. |
+| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
+</Banner>
+
+### Pagination
+
+All Collections receive their own List View which displays a paginated list of documents that can be sorted and filtered. The pagination behavior of the List View can be customized on a per-Collection basis, and uses the same [Pagination](../queries/pagination) API that Payload provides.
+
+To configure pagination options, use the `admin.pagination` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    pagination: {
+      defaultLimit: 10,
+      limits: [10, 20, 50],
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option         | Description                                                                                         |
+| -------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `defaultLimit` | Integer that specifies the default per-page limit that should be used. Defaults to 10.              |
+| `limits`       | Provide an array of integers to use as per-page options for admins to choose from in the List View. |
+
+### List Searchable Fields
+
+In the List View, there is a "search" box that allows you to quickly find a document through a simple text search. By default, it searches on the ID field. If defined, the `admin.useAsTitle` field is used. Or, you can explicitly define which fields to search based on the needs of your application.
+
+To define which fields should be searched, use the `admin.listSearchableFields` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    listSearchableFields: ['title', 'slug'],
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  If you are adding `listSearchableFields`, make sure you index each of these fields so your admin queries can remain performant.
+</Banner>

docs/admin/components.mdx

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 ---
 title: Swap in your own React components
 label: Custom Components
-order: 20
+order: 40
 desc: Fully customize your Admin Panel by swapping in your own React components. Add fields, remove views, update routes and change functions to sculpt your perfect Dashboard.
 keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
@@ -18,12 +18,226 @@ All Custom Components in Payload are [React Server Components](https://react.dev
 There are four main types of Custom Components in Payload:
 
 - [Root Components](#root-components)
-- [Collection Components](#collection-components)
-- [Global Components](#global-components)
+- [Collection Components](./collections#components)
+- [Global Components](./globals#components)
 - [Field Components](./fields)
 
 To swap in your own Custom Component, consult the list of available components. Determine the scope that corresponds to what you are trying to accomplish, then [author your React component(s)](#building-custom-components) accordingly.
 
+
+## Defining Custom Components in the Payload Config
+
+In the Payload Config, you can define custom React Components to enhance the admin interface. However, these components should not be imported directly into the server-only Payload Config to avoid including client-side code. Instead, you specify the path to the component. Here’s how you can do it:
+
+
+src/components/Logout.tsx
+```tsx
+'use client'
+import React from 'react'
+
+export const MyComponent = () => {
+  return (
+    <button>Click me!</button>
+  )
+}
+```
+
+payload.config.ts:
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    components: {
+      logout: {
+        Button: '/src/components/Logout#MyComponent'
+      }
+    }
+  },
+})
+```
+
+In the path `/src/components/Logout#MyComponent`, `/src/components/Logout` is the file path, and `MyComponent` is the named export. If the component is the default export, the export name can be omitted. Path and export name are separated by a `#`.
+
+### Configuring the Base Directory
+
+Component paths, by default, are relative to your working directory - this is usually where your Next.js config lies. To simplify component paths, you have the option to configure the *base directory* using the `admin.baseDir.baseDir` property:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { fileURLToPath } from 'node:url'
+import path from 'path'
+const filename = fileURLToPath(import.meta.url)
+const dirname = path.dirname(filename)
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+     importMap: {
+      baseDir: path.resolve(dirname, 'src'),
+    },
+    components: {
+      logout: {
+        Button: '/components/Logout#MyComponent'
+      }
+    }
+  },
+})
+```
+
+In this example, we set the base directory to the `src` directory - thus we can omit the `/src/` part of our component path string.
+
+### Passing Props
+
+Each React Component in the Payload Config is typed as `PayloadComponent`. This usually is a string, but can also be an object containing the following properties:
+
+| Property      | Description                                                                                                                   |
+|---------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `clientProps` | Props to be passed to the React Component if it's a Client Component                                                          |
+| `exportName`  | Instead of declaring named exports using `#` in the component path, you can also omit them from `path` and pass them in here. |
+| `path`        | Path to the React Component. Named exports can be appended to the end of the path, separated by a `#`                         |
+| `serverProps` | Props to be passed to the React Component if it's a Server Component                                                          |
+
+To pass in props from the config, you can use the `clientProps` and/or `serverProps` properties. This alleviates the need to use an HOC (Higher-Order-Component) to declare a React Component with props passed in.
+
+Here is an example:
+
+src/components/Logout.tsx
+```tsx
+'use client'
+import React from 'react'
+
+export const MyComponent = ({ text }: { text: string }) => {
+  return (
+    <button>Click me! {text}</button>
+  )
+}
+```
+
+payload.config.ts:
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+const config = buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    components: {
+      logout: {
+        Button: {
+          path: '/src/components/Logout',
+          clientProps: {
+            text: 'Some Text.'
+          },
+          exportName: 'MyComponent'
+        }
+      }
+    }
+  },
+})
+```
+
+### Import Maps
+
+It's essential to understand how `PayloadComponent` paths function behind the scenes. Directly importing React Components into your Payload Config using import statements can introduce client-only modules like CSS into your server-only config. This could error when attempting to load the Payload Config in server-only environments and unnecessarily increase the size of the Payload Config, which should remain streamlined and efficient for server use.
+
+Instead, we utilize component paths to reference React Components. This method enhances the Payload Config with actual React Component imports on the client side, without affecting server-side usage. A script is deployed to scan the Payload Config, collecting all component paths and creating an `importMap.js`. This file, located in app/(payload)/admin/importMap.js, must be statically imported by your Next.js root page and layout. The script imports all the React Components from the specified paths into a Map, associating them with their respective paths (the ones you defined).
+
+When constructing the `ClientConfig`, Payload uses the component paths as keys to fetch the corresponding React Component imports from the Import Map. It then substitutes the `PayloadComponent` with a `MappedComponent`. A `MappedComponent` includes the React Component and additional metadata, such as whether it's a server or a client component and which props it should receive. These components are then rendered through the `<RenderComponent />` component within the Payload Admin Panel.
+
+Import maps are regenerated whenever you modify any element related to component paths. This regeneration occurs at startup and whenever Hot Module Replacement (HMR) runs. If the import maps fail to regenerate during HMR, you can restart your application and execute the `payload generate:importmap` command to manually create a new import map. If you encounter any errors running this command, see the [Troubleshooting](/docs/beta/local-api/outside-nextjs#troubleshooting) section.
+
+### Component paths in external packages
+
+Component paths are resolved relative to your project's base directory, which is either your current working directory or the directory specified in `config.admin.baseDir`. When using custom components from external packages, you can't use relative paths. Instead, use an import path that's accessible as if you were writing an import statement in your project's base directory.
+
+For example, to export a field with a custom component from an external package named `my-external-package`:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
+export const MyCustomField: Field = {
+  type: 'text',
+  name: 'MyField',
+  admin: {
+    components: {
+      Field: 'my-external-package/client#MyFieldComponent'
+    }
+  }
+}
+```
+
+Despite `MyFieldComponent` living in `src/components/MyFieldComponent.tsx` in `my-external-package`, this will not be accessible from the consuming project. Instead, we recommend exporting all custom components from one file in the external package. For example, you can define a `src/client.ts file in `my-external-package`:
+
+```ts
+'use client'
+export { MyFieldComponent } from './components/MyFieldComponent'
+```
+
+Then, update the package.json of `my-external-package:
+
+```json
+{
+...
+  "exports": {
+    "./client": {
+        "import": "./dist/client.js",
+        "types": "./dist/client.d.ts",
+        "default": "./dist/client.js"
+    }
+  }
+}
+```
+
+This setup allows you to specify the component path as `my-external-package/client#MyFieldComponent` as seen above. The import map will generate:
+
+```ts
+import { MyFieldComponent } from 'my-external-package/client'
+```
+
+which is a valid way to access MyFieldComponent that can be resolved by the consuming project.
+
+### Custom Components from unknown locations
+
+By default, any component paths from known locations are added to the import map. However, if you need to add any components from unknown locations to the import map, you can do so by adding them to the `admin.dependencies` array in your Payload Config. This is mostly only relevant for plugin authors and not for regular Payload users.
+
+Example:
+
+```ts
+export default {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // ...
+    dependencies: {
+      myTestComponent: { // myTestComponent is the key - can be anything
+        path: '/components/TestComponent.js#TestComponent',
+        type: 'component',
+        clientProps: {
+          test: 'hello',
+        },
+      },
+    },
+  }
+}
+```
+
+This way, `TestComponent` is added to the import map, no matter if it's referenced in a known location or not. On the client, you can then use the component like this:
+
+```tsx
+'use client'
+
+import { RenderComponent, useConfig } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import React from 'react'
+
+export const CustomView = () => {
+  const { config } = useConfig()
+  return (
+    <div>
+      <RenderComponent mappedComponent={config.admin.dependencies?.myTestComponent} />
+    </div>
+  )
+}
+```
+
 ## Root Components
 
 Root Components are those that effect the [Admin Panel](./overview) generally, such as the logo or the main nav.
@@ -33,16 +247,14 @@ To override Root Components, use the `admin.components` property in your [Payloa
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
-import { MyCustomLogo } from './MyCustomLogo'
-
 export default buildConfig({
   // ...
   admin: {
+    // highlight-start
     components: {
-      graphics: {
-        Logo: MyCustomLogo, // highlight-line
-      },
+      // ...
     },
+    // highlight-end
   },
 })
 ```
@@ -63,30 +275,30 @@ The following options are available:
 | **`logout.Button`**   | The button displayed in the sidebar that logs the user out.                                                                                                                                                         |
 | **`graphics.Icon`**   | The simplified logo used in contexts like the the `Nav` component.                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`graphics.Logo`**   | The full logo used in contexts like the `Login` view.                                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`providers`**       | Custom [React Context](https://react.dev/learn/scaling-up-with-reducer-and-context) providers that will wrap the entire [Admin Panel](./overview). [More details](#custom-providers).                                       |
-| **`actions`**         | An array of Custom Components to be rendered in the header of the [Admin Panel](./overview), providing additional interactivity and functionality.                                                                  |
-| **`views`**           | Override or create new views within the [Admin Panel](./overview). [More details](./views).                                                                                                                                 |
+| **`providers`**       | Custom [React Context](https://react.dev/learn/scaling-up-with-reducer-and-context) providers that will wrap the entire Admin Panel. [More details](#custom-providers).                                       |
+| **`actions`**         | An array of Custom Components to be rendered _within_ the header of the Admin Panel, providing additional interactivity and functionality.                                                                  |
+| **`header`**          | An array of Custom Components to be injected above the Payload header.                                                   |
+| **`views`**           | Override or create new views within the Admin Panel. [More details](./views).                                                                                                                                 |
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Note:</strong> You can also use the `admin.components` property in your _[Collection](#collection-components) or [Global](#global-components)_.
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  You can also use set [Collection Components](./collections#components) and [Global Components](./globals#components) in their respective configs.
 </Banner>
 
 ### Custom Providers
 
-As you add more and more Custom Components to your [Admin Panel](./overview), you may find it helpful to add additional [React Context](https://react.dev/learn/scaling-up-with-reducer-and-context)(s). Payload allows you to inject your own context providers in your app where you can export your own custom hooks, etc.
+As you add more and more Custom Components to your [Admin Panel](./overview), you may find it helpful to add additional [React Context](https://react.dev/learn/scaling-up-with-reducer-and-context)(s). Payload allows you to inject your own context providers in your app so you can export your own custom hooks, etc.
 
 To add a Custom Provider, use the `admin.components.providers` property in your [Payload Config](../getting-started/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
-import { MyProvider } from './MyProvider'
-
 export default buildConfig({
   // ...
   admin: {
     components: {
-      providers: [MyProvider], // highlight-line
+      providers: ['/path/to/MyProvider'], // highlight-line
     },
   },
 })
@@ -115,80 +327,6 @@ export const useMyCustomContext = () => useContext(MyCustomContext)
   <strong>Reminder:</strong> Custom Providers are by definition Client Components. This means they must include the `use client` directive at the top of their files and cannot use server-only code.
 </Banner>
 
-## Collection Components
-
-Collection Components are those that effect [Collection](../configuration/collections)-specific UI within the [Admin Panel](./overview), such as the save button or the List View.
-
-To override Collection Components, use the `admin.components` property in your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
-
-```ts
-import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-import { CustomSaveButton } from './CustomSaveButton'
-
-export const MyCollection: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'my-collection',
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      edit: {
-        SaveButton: CustomSaveButton, // highlight-line
-      },
-    },
-  },
-  // ...
-}
-```
-
-_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](#building-custom-components)._
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Path                       | Description                                                                                                            |
-| -------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`beforeList`**           | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View                                                          |
-| **`beforeListTable`**      | An array of components to inject _before_ the built-in List View's table                                                  |
-| **`afterList`**            | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View                                                           |
-| **`afterListTable`**       | An array of components to inject _after_ the built-in List View's table                                                   |
-| **`edit.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default `Save` button with a Custom Component. Drafts must be disabled                                     |
-| **`edit.SaveDraftButton`** | Replace the default `Save Draft` button with a Custom Component. Drafts must be enabled and autosave must be disabled. |
-| **`edit.PublishButton`**   | Replace the default `Publish` button with a Custom Component. Drafts must be enabled.                                  |
-| **`edit.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default `Preview` button with a Custom Component.                                                          |
-| **`views`**                | Override or create new views within the [Admin Panel](./overview). [More details](./views).                                     |
-
-## Global Components
-
-Global Components are those that effect [Global](../configuration/globals)-specific UI within the [Admin Panel](./overview), such as the save button or the Edit View.
-
-To override Global Components, use the `admin.components` property in your [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
-
-```ts
-import type { SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-import { CustomSaveButton } from './CustomSaveButton'
-
-export const MyGlobal: SanitizedGlobalConfig = {
-  slug: 'my-global',
-  admin: {
-    components: {
-      elements: {
-        SaveButton: CustomSaveButton, // highlight-line
-      },
-    },
-  },
-  // ...
-}
-```
-
-_For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](#building-custom-components)._
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Path                           | Description                                                                                                            |
-| ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`elements.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default `Save` button with a Custom Component. Drafts must be disabled.                                    |
-| **`elements.SaveDraftButton`** | Replace the default `Save Draft` button with a Custom Component. Drafts must be enabled and autosave must be disabled. |
-| **`elements.PublishButton`**   | Replace the default `Publish` button with a Custom Component. Drafts must be enabled.                                  |
-| **`elements.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default `Preview` button with a Custom Component.                                                          |
-| **`views`**                    | Override or create new views within the [Admin Panel](./overview). [More details](./views).                                     |
-
 ## Building Custom Components
 
 All Custom Components in Payload are [React Server Components](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/server-components) by default, with the exception of [Custom Providers](#custom-providers). This enables the use of the [Local API](../local-api) directly on the front-end, among other things.
@@ -219,7 +357,7 @@ Each Custom Component receives the following props by default:
 | Prop                      | Description                                                                                           |
 | ------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | `payload`                 | The [Payload](../local-api/overview) class.                                                           |
-| `i18n`                    | The [i18n](../i18n) object.                                                                           |
+| `i18n`                    | The [i18n](../configuration/i18n) object.                                                                           |
 
 Custom Components also receive various other props that are specific to the context in which the Custom Component is being rendered. For example, [Custom Views](./views) receive the `user` prop. For a full list of available props, consult the documentation related to the specific component you are working with.
 
@@ -280,7 +418,7 @@ import React from 'react'
 import { useConfig } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
 export const MyClientComponent: React.FC = () => {
-  const { serverURL } = useConfig() // highlight-line
+  const { config: { serverURL } } = useConfig() // highlight-line
 
   return (
     <Link href={serverURL}>
@@ -294,6 +432,22 @@ export const MyClientComponent: React.FC = () => {
   See [Using Hooks](#using-hooks) for more details.
 </Banner>
 
+All [Field Components](./fields) automatically receive their respective Field Config through a common [`field`](./fields#the-field-prop) prop:
+
+```tsx
+'use client'
+import React from 'react'
+import type { TextFieldClientComponent } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyClientFieldComponent: TextFieldClientComponent = ({ field: { name } }) => {
+  return (
+    <p>
+      {`This field's name is ${name}`}
+    </p>
+  )
+}
+```
+
 ### Using Hooks
 
 To make it easier to [build your Custom Components](#building-custom-components), you can use [Payload's built-in React Hooks](./hooks) in any Client Component. For example, you might want to interact with one of Payload's many React Contexts:

docs/admin/customizing-css.mdx

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 ---
 title: Customizing CSS & SCSS
 label: Customizing CSS
-order: 60
+order: 80
 desc: Customize the Payload Admin Panel further by adding your own CSS or SCSS style sheet to the configuration, powerful theme and design options are waiting for you.
 keywords: admin, css, scss, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---

docs/admin/fields.mdx

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 ---
 title: Customizing Fields
 label: Customizing Fields
-order: 40
+order: 60
 desc:
 keywords:
 ---
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ For example, your app might need to render a specific interface that Payload doe
 
 ## Admin Options
 
-You can customize the appearance and behavior of fields within the [Admin Panel](./overvieW) through the `admin` property of any [Field Config](../fields/overview):
+You can customize the appearance and behavior of fields within the [Admin Panel](./overview) through the `admin` property of any [Field Config](../fields/overview):
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ export const CollectionConfig: CollectionConfig = {
       // ...
       admin: {
         components: {
-          Field: MyFieldComponent, // highlight-line
+          Field: '/path/to/MyFieldComponent', // highlight-line
         },
       },
     }
@@ -135,32 +135,13 @@ All Field Components receive the following props:
 
 | Property         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
 | ---------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`AfterInput`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.afterInput` property. [More details](#afterinput-and-beforeinput).                                                                                                      |
-| **`BeforeInput`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.beforeInput` property. [More details](#afterinput-and-beforeinput).                                                                                                      |
-| **`CustomDescription`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.Description` property. [More details](#the-description-component).                                                                                                      |
-| **`CustomError`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.Error` property. [More details](#the-error-component).                                                                                                      |
-| **`CustomLabel`** | The rendered result of the `admin.components.Label` property. [More details](#the-label-component).
-| **`path`**       | The static path of the field at render time. [More details](./hooks#usefieldprops). |
-| **`disabled`**   | The `admin.disabled` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`required`**   | The `admin.required` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`className`**  | The `admin.className` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`style`**      | The `admin.style` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview).                                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`custom`**     | The `admin.custom` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview).
-| **`placeholder`** | The `admin.placeholder` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`descriptionProps`** | An object that contains the props for the `FieldDescription` component.                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`labelProps`** | An object that contains the props needed for the `FieldLabel` component.                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`errorProps`** | An object that contains the props for the `FieldError` component.                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`docPreferences`** | An object that contains the preferences for the document.                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`label`**      | The label value provided in the field, it can be used with i18n.                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| **`docPreferences`** | An object that contains the [Preferences](./preferences) for the document.
+| **`field`** | In Server Components, this is the original Field Config. In Client Components, this is the sanitized Client Field Config. [More details](#the-field-prop). |
+| **`clientField`** | Server components receive the Client Field Config through this prop. [More details](#the-field-prop). |
 | **`locale`**     | The locale of the field. [More details](../configuration/localization).                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`localized`**  | A boolean value that represents if the field is localized or not. [More details](../fields/localized).                                                                                                                                                                   |
 | **`readOnly`**   | A boolean value that represents if the field is read-only or not.                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`rtl`**        | A boolean value that represents if the field should be rendered right-to-left or not. [More details](../configuration/i18n).                                                                                           |
 | **`user`**       | The currently authenticated user. [More details](../authentication/overview). |
 | **`validate`**   | A function that can be used to validate the field.                                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| **`hasMany`**    | If a [`relationship`](../fields/relationship) field, the `hasMany` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`maxLength`**  | If a [`text`](../fields/text) field, the `maxLength` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`minLength`**  | If a [`text`](../fields/text) field, the `minLength` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Reminder:</strong>
@@ -193,6 +174,82 @@ export const CustomTextField: React.FC = () => {
   For a complete list of all available React hooks, see the [Payload React Hooks](./hooks) documentation. For additional help, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components).
 </Banner>
 
+#### TypeScript
+
+When building Custom Field Components, you can import the component type to ensure type safety. There is an explicit type for the Field Component, one for every [Field Type](../fields/overview) and for every client/server environment. The convention is to prepend the field type onto the target type, i.e. `TextFieldClientComponent`:
+
+```tsx
+import type {
+  TextFieldClientComponent,
+  TextFieldServerComponent,
+  TextFieldClientProps,
+  TextFieldServerProps,
+  // ...and so on for each Field Type
+} from 'payload'
+```
+
+### The `field` Prop
+
+All Field Components are passed their own Field Config through a common `field` prop. Within Server Components, this is the original Field Config as written within your Payload Config. Within Client Components, however, this is a "Client Config", which is a sanitized, client-friendly version of the Field Config. This is because the original Field Config is [non-serializable](https://react.dev/reference/rsc/use-client#serializable-types), meaning it cannot be passed into Client Components without first being transformed.
+
+The Client Field Config is an exact copy of the original Field Config, minus all non-serializable properties, plus all evaluated functions such as field labels, [Custom Components](../components), etc.
+
+Server Component:
+
+```tsx
+import React from 'react'
+import type { TextFieldServerComponent } from 'payload'
+import { TextField } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+
+export const MyServerField: TextFieldServerComponent = ({ clientField }) => {
+  return <TextField field={clientField} />
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Server Components can still access the original Field Config through the `field` prop.
+</Banner>
+
+Client Component:
+
+```tsx
+'use client'
+import React from 'react'
+import type { TextFieldClientComponent } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyTextField: TextFieldClientComponent = ({ field }) => {
+  return <TextField field={field} />
+}
+```
+
+The following additional properties are also provided to the `field` prop:
+
+| Property         | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| ---------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`_isPresentational`** | A boolean indicating that the field is purely visual and does not directly affect data or change data shape, i.e. the [UI Field](../fields/ui). |
+| **`_path`** | A string representing the direct, dynamic path to the field at runtime, i.e. `myGroup.myArray[0].myField`. |
+| **`_schemaPath`** | A string representing the direct, static path to the [Field Config](../fields/overview), i.e. `myGroup.myArray.myField` |
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  These properties are underscored to denote that they are not part of the original Field Config, and instead are attached during client sanitization to make fields easier to work with on the front-end.
+</Banner>
+
+#### TypeScript
+
+When building Custom Field Components, you can import the client field props to ensure type safety in your component. There is an explicit type for the Field Component, one for every [Field Type](../fields/overview) and server/client environment. The convention is to prepend the field type onto the target type, i.e. `TextFieldClientComponent`:
+
+```tsx
+import type {
+  TextFieldClientComponent,
+  TextFieldServerComponent,
+  TextFieldClientProps,
+  TextFieldServerProps,
+  // ...and so on for each Field Type
+} from 'payload'
+```
+
 ### The Cell Component
 
 The Cell Component is rendered in the table of the List View. It represents the value of the field when displayed in a table cell.
@@ -207,7 +264,7 @@ export const myField: Field = {
   type: 'text',
   admin: {
     components: {
-      Cell: MyCustomCell, // highlight-line
+      Cell: '/path/to/MyCustomCellComponent', // highlight-line
     },
   },
 }
@@ -219,20 +276,10 @@ All Cell Components receive the following props:
 
 | Property         | Description                                                       |
 | ---------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** | The name of the field. |
-| **`className`**  | The `admin.className` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`fieldType`** | The `type` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`schemaPath`** | The path to the field in the schema. Similar to `path`, but without dynamic indices. |
-| **`isFieldAffectingData`** | A boolean value that represents if the field is affecting the data or not. |
-| **`label`** | The label value provided in the field, it can be used with i18n. |
-| **`labels`** | An object that contains the labels for the field. |
+| **`field`** | In Server Components, this is the original Field Config. In Client Components, this is the sanitized Client Field Config. [More details](#the-field-prop). |
+| **`clientField`** | Server components receive the Client Field Config through this prop. [More details](#the-field-prop). |
 | **`link`** | A boolean representing whether this cell should be wrapped in a link. |
 | **`onClick`** | A function that is called when the cell is clicked. |
-| **`dateDisplayFormat`** | If a [`date`](../fields/date) field, the `admin.dateDisplayFormat` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`options`** | If a [`select`](../fields/select) field, this is an array of options defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). [More details](../fields/select). |
-| **`relationTo`** | If a [`relationship`](../fields/relationship). or [`upload`](../fields/upload) field, this is the collection(s) the field is related to. |
-| **`richTextComponentMap`** | If a [`richText`](../fields/rich-text) field, this is an object that maps the rich text components. [More details](../fields/rich-text). |
-| **`blocks`** | If a [`blocks`](../fields/blocks) field, this is an array of labels and slugs representing the blocks defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). [More details](../fields/blocks). |
 
 <Banner type="info">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
@@ -258,7 +305,7 @@ export const myField: Field = {
   type: 'text',
   admin: {
     components: {
-      Label: MyCustomLabel, // highlight-line
+      Label: '/path/to/MyCustomLabelComponent', // highlight-line
     },
   },
 }
@@ -266,19 +313,30 @@ export const myField: Field = {
 
 _For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
 
-All Label Components receive the following props:
+Custom Label Components receive all [Field Component](#the-field-component) props, plus the following props:
 
 | Property       | Description                                                      |
 | -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`label`**    | Label value provided in field, it can be used with i18n.         |
-| **`required`** | The `admin.required` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview). |
-| **`schemaPath`** | The path to the field in the schema. Similar to `path`, but without dynamic indices. |
+| **`field`** | In Server Components, this is the original Field Config. In Client Components, this is the sanitized Client Field Config. [More details](#the-field-prop). |
+| **`clientField`** | Server components receive the Client Field Config through this prop. [More details](#the-field-prop). |
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive the `payload` and `i18n` properties by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
 </Banner>
 
+#### TypeScript
+
+When building Custom Label Components, you can import the component props to ensure type safety in your component. There is an explicit type for the Label Component, one for every [Field Type](../fields/overview) and server/client environment. The convention is to append `LabelServerComponent` or `LabelClientComponent` to the type of field, i.e. `TextFieldLabelClientComponent`.
+
+```tsx
+import type {
+  TextFieldLabelServerComponent,
+  TextFieldLabelClientComponent,
+  // ...and so on for each Field Type
+} from 'payload'
+```
+
 ### The Error Component
 
 The Error Component is rendered when a field fails validation. It is typically displayed beneath the field input in a visually-compelling style.
@@ -293,7 +351,7 @@ export const myField: Field = {
   type: 'text',
   admin: {
     components: {
-      Error: MyCustomError, // highlight-line
+      Error: '/path/to/MyCustomErrorComponent', // highlight-line
     },
   },
 }
@@ -301,17 +359,30 @@ export const myField: Field = {
 
 _For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
 
-All Error Components receive the following props:
+Custom Error Components receive all [Field Component](#the-field-component) props, plus the following props:
 
 | Property        | Description                                                   |
 | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`path`***       | The static path of the field at render time. [More details](./hooks#usefieldprops). |
+| **`field`** | In Server Components, this is the original Field Config. In Client Components, this is the sanitized Client Field Config. [More details](#the-field-prop). |
+| **`clientField`** | Server components receive the Client Field Config through this prop. [More details](#the-field-prop). |
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive the `payload` and `i18n` properties by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
 </Banner>
 
+#### TypeScript
+
+When building Custom Error Components, you can import the component props to ensure type safety in your component. There is an explicit type for the Error Component, one for every [Field Type](../fields/overview) and server/client environment. The convention is to append `ErrorServerComponent` or `ErrorClientComponent` to the type of field, i.e. `TextFieldErrorClientComponent`.
+
+```tsx
+import type {
+  TextFieldErrorServerComponent,
+  TextFieldErrorClientComponent,
+  // And so on for each Field Type
+} from 'payload'
+```
+
 ### The Description Property
 
 Field Descriptions are used to provide additional information to the editor about a field, such as special instructions. Their placement varies from field to field, but typically are displayed with subtle style differences beneath the field inputs.
@@ -385,7 +456,6 @@ To easily add a Description Component to a field, use the `admin.components.Desc
 
 ```ts
 import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-import { MyCustomDescription } from './MyCustomDescription'
 
 export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
   // ...
@@ -396,7 +466,7 @@ export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
       type: 'text',
       admin: {
         components: {
-          Description: MyCustomDescription, // highlight-line
+          Description: '/path/to/MyCustomDescriptionComponent', // highlight-line
         }
       }
     }
@@ -406,17 +476,30 @@ export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
 
 _For details on how to build a Custom Description, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components)._
 
-All Description Components receive the following props:
+Custom Description Components receive all [Field Component](#the-field-component) props, plus the following props:
 
 | Property       | Description                                                      |
 | -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`description`**    | The `description` property defined in the [Field Config](../fields/overview).         |
+| **`field`** | In Server Components, this is the original Field Config. In Client Components, this is the sanitized Client Field Config. [More details](#the-field-prop). |
+| **`clientField`** | Server components receive the Client Field Config through this prop. [More details](#the-field-prop). |
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   All [Custom Server Components](./components) receive the `payload` and `i18n` properties by default. See [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components) for more details.
 </Banner>
 
+#### TypeScript
+
+When building Custom Description Components, you can import the component props to ensure type safety in your component. There is an explicit type for the Description Component, one for every [Field Type](../fields/overview) and server/client environment. The convention is to append `DescriptionServerComponent` or `DescriptionClientComponent` to the type of field, i.e. `TextFieldDescriptionClientComponent`.
+
+```tsx
+import type {
+  TextFieldDescriptionServerComponent,
+  TextFieldDescriptionClientComponent,
+  // And so on for each Field Type
+} from 'payload'
+```
+
 ### afterInput and beforeInput
 
 With these properties you can add multiple components _before_ and _after_ the input element, as their name suggests. This is useful when you need to render additional elements alongside the field without replacing the entire field component.
@@ -436,8 +519,8 @@ export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
       admin: {
         components: {
           // highlight-start
-          beforeInput: [MyCustomComponent],
-          afterInput: [MyOtherCustomComponent],
+          beforeInput: ['/path/to/MyCustomComponent'],
+          afterInput: ['/path/to/MyOtherCustomComponent'],
           // highlight-end
         }
       }

docs/admin/globals.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
+---
+title: Global Admin Config
+label: Globals
+order: 30
+desc:
+keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+The behavior of [Globals](../configuration/globals) within the [Admin Panel](./overview) can be fully customized to fit the needs of your application. This includes grouping or hiding their navigation links, adding [Custom Components](./components), setting page metadata, and more.
+
+To configure Admin Options for Globals, use the `admin` property in your Global Config:
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyGlobal: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+## Admin Options
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option        | Description                                                                                                                       |
+| ------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`group`**       | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                         |
+| **`hidden`**      | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Global from navigation and admin routing. |
+| **`components`**  | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Global. [More details](#components).                           |
+| **`preview`**     | Function to generate a preview URL within the Admin Panel for this Global that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).           |
+| **`livePreview`** | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).          |
+| **`hideAPIURL`**  | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this collection.                                                    |
+| **`meta`**        | Page metadata overrides to apply to this Global within the Admin Panel. [More details](./metadata).                                                                           |
+
+### Components
+
+Globals can set their own [Custom Components](./components) which only apply to [Global](../configuration/globals)-specific UI within the [Admin Panel](./overview). This includes elements such as the Save Button, or entire layouts such as the Edit View.
+
+To override Global Components, use the `admin.components` property in your [Global Config](../configuration/globals):
+
+```ts
+import type { SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyGlobal: SanitizedGlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    components: { // highlight-line
+      // ...
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Path                           | Description                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`elements.SaveButton`**      | Replace the default Save Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be disabled.                                    |
+| **`elements.SaveDraftButton`** | Replace the default Save Draft Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled and autosave must be disabled. |
+| **`elements.PublishButton`**   | Replace the default Publish Button with a Custom Component. [Drafts](../versions/drafts) must be enabled.                                  |
+| **`elements.PreviewButton`**   | Replace the default Preview Button with a Custom Component. [Preview](#preview) must be enabled.                                         |
+| **`views`**                    | Override or create new views within the Admin Panel. [More details](./views).                                     |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For details on how to build Custom Components, see [Building Custom Components](./components#building-custom-components).
+</Banner>
+
+### Preview
+
+It is possible to display a Preview Button within the Edit View of the Admin Panel. This will allow editors to visit the frontend of your app the corresponds to the document they are actively editing. This way they can preview the latest, potentially unpublished changes.
+
+To configure the Preview Button, set the `admin.preview` property to a function in your Global Config:
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MainMenu: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
+      if (doc?.slug) {
+        return `/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
+      }
+
+      return null
+    },
+    // highlight-end
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The preview function receives two arguments:
+
+| Argument | Description |
+| --- | --- |
+| **`doc`** | The Document being edited. |
+| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
+</Banner>

docs/admin/hooks.mdx

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 ---
 title: React Hooks
 label: React Hooks
-order: 50
+order: 70
 desc: Make use of all of the powerful React hooks that Payload provides.
 keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ The `useField` hook accepts the following arguments:
 The `useField` hook returns the following object:
 
 ```ts
-type FieldResult<T> = {
+type FieldType<T> = {
   errorMessage?: string
   errorPaths?: string[]
   filterOptions?: FilterOptionsResult
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ type FieldResult<T> = {
   readOnly?: boolean
   rows?: Row[]
   schemaPath: string
-  setValue: (val: unknown, disableModifyingForm?: boolean) => voi
+  setValue: (val: unknown, disableModifyingForm?: boolean) => void
   showError: boolean
   valid?: boolean
   value: T
@@ -74,9 +74,9 @@ type FieldResult<T> = {
 
 ## useFieldProps
 
-All [Custom Field Components](./fields#the-field-component) are rendered on the server, and as such, only have access to static props at render time. But, some fields can be dynamic, such as when nested in an [`array`](../fields/array) or [`blocks`](../fields/block) field. For example, items can be added, re-ordered, or deleted on-the-fly.
+[Custom Field Components](./fields#the-field-component) can be rendered on the server. When using a server component as a custom field component, you can access dynamic props from within any client component rendered by your custom server component. This is done using the `useFieldProps` hook. This is important because some fields can be dynamic, such as when nested in an [`array`](../fields/array) or [`blocks`](../fields/block) field. For example, items can be added, re-ordered, or deleted on-the-fly.
 
-For this reason, dynamic props like `path` are managed in their own React context, which can be accessed using the `useFieldProps` hook:
+You can use the `useFieldProps` hooks to access dynamic props like `path`:
 
 ```tsx
 'use client'
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ You can pass a Redux-like selector into the hook, which will ensure that you ret
 
 ```tsx
 'use client'
-import type { useFormFields } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import { useFormFields } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
 const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // Get only the `amount` field state, and only cause a rerender when that field changes
@@ -463,7 +463,7 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
       name: "customArrayManager",
       admin: {
         components: {
-          Field: CustomArrayManager,
+          Field: '/path/to/CustomArrayManagerField',
         },
       },
     },
@@ -560,7 +560,7 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
       name: "customArrayManager",
       admin: {
         components: {
-          Field: CustomArrayManager,
+          Field: '/path/to/CustomArrayManagerField',
         },
       },
     },
@@ -670,7 +670,7 @@ export const CustomArrayManager = () => {
       name: "customArrayManager",
       admin: {
         components: {
-          Field: CustomArrayManager,
+          Field: '/path/to/CustomArrayManagerField',
         },
       },
     },
@@ -818,7 +818,7 @@ import { useConfig } from '@payloadcms/ui'
 
 const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
   // highlight-start
-  const config = useConfig()
+  const { config } = useConfig()
   // highlight-end
 
   return <span>{config.serverURL}</span>

docs/admin/locked-documents.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+---
+title: Document Locking
+label: Document Locking
+order: 90
+desc: Ensure your documents are locked while being edited, preventing concurrent edits from multiple users and preserving data integrity.
+keywords: locking, document locking, edit locking, document, concurrency, Payload, headless, Content Management System, cms, javascript, react, node, nextjs
+---
+
+Document locking in Payload ensures that only one user at a time can edit a document, preventing data conflicts and accidental overwrites. When a document is locked, other users are prevented from making changes until the lock is released, ensuring data integrity in collaborative environments.
+
+The lock is automatically triggered when a user begins editing a document within the Admin Panel and remains in place until the user exits the editing view or the lock expires due to inactivity.
+
+## How it works
+
+When a user starts editing a document, Payload locks the document for that user. If another user tries to access the same document, they will be notified that it is currently being edited and can choose one of the following options:
+
+- View in Read-Only Mode: View the document without making any changes.
+- Take Over Editing: Take over editing from the current user, which locks the document for the new editor and notifies the original user.
+- Return to Dashboard: Navigate away from the locked document and continue with other tasks.
+
+The lock will automatically expire after a set period of inactivity, configurable using the duration property in the lockDocuments configuration, after which others can resume editing.
+
+<Banner type="info"> <strong>Note:</strong> If your application does not require document locking, you can disable this feature for any collection by setting the <code>lockDocuments</code> property to <code>false</code>. </Banner>
+
+### Config Options
+
+The lockDocuments property exists on both the Collection Config and the Global Config. By default, document locking is enabled for all collections and globals, but you can customize the lock duration or disable the feature entirely.
+
+Here’s an example configuration for document locking:
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
+  slug: 'posts',
+  fields: [
+    {
+      name: 'title',
+      type: 'text',
+    },
+    // other fields...
+  ],
+  lockDocuments: {
+    duration: 600, // Duration in seconds
+  },
+}
+```
+
+#### Locking Options
+
+| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                    |
+| ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
+| **`lockDocuments`** | Enables or disables document locking for the collection or global. By default, document locking is enabled. Set to an object to configure, or set to false to disable locking. |
+| **`duration`**      | Specifies the duration (in seconds) for how long a document remains locked without user interaction. The default is 300 seconds (5 minutes).                                   |
+
+### Impact on APIs
+
+Document locking affects both the Local API and the REST API, ensuring that if a document is locked, concurrent users will not be able to perform updates or deletes on that document (including globals). If a user attempts to update or delete a locked document, they will receive an error.
+
+Once the document is unlocked or the lock duration has expired, other users can proceed with updates or deletes as normal.
+
+#### Overriding Locks
+
+For operations like update and delete, Payload includes an `overrideLock` option. This boolean flag, when set to `false`, enforces document locks, ensuring that the operation will not proceed if another user currently holds the lock.
+
+By default, `overrideLock` is set to `true`, which means that document locks are ignored, and the operation will proceed even if the document is locked. To enforce locks and prevent updates or deletes on locked documents, set `overrideLock: false`.
+
+```ts
+const result = await payload.update({
+  collection: 'posts',
+  id: '123',
+  data: {
+    title: 'New title',
+  },
+  overrideLock: false, // Enforces the document lock, preventing updates if the document is locked
+})
+```
+
+This option is particularly useful in scenarios where administrative privileges or specific workflows require you to override the lock and ensure the operation is completed.

docs/admin/metadata.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,216 @@
+---
+title: Page Metadata
+label: Metadata
+order: 70
+desc: Customize the metadata of your pages within the Admin Panel
+keywords: admin, components, custom, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+Every page within the Admin Panel automatically receives dynamic, auto-generated metadata derived from live document data, the user's current locale, and more, without any additional configuration. This includes the page title, description, og:image and everything in between. Metadata is fully configurable at the root level and cascades down to individual collections, documents, and custom views, allowing for the ability to control metadata on any page with high precision.
+
+Within the Admin Panel, metadata can be customized at the following levels:
+
+- [Root Metadata](#root-metadata)
+- [Collection Metadata](#collection-metadata)
+- [Global Metadata](#global-metadata)
+- [View Metadata](#view-metadata)
+
+All of these types of metadata share a similar structure, with a few key differences on the Root level. To customize metadata, consult the list of available scopes. Determine the scope that corresponds to what you are trying to accomplish, then author your metadata within the Payload Config accordingly.
+
+## Root Metadata
+
+Root Metadata is the metadata that is applied to all pages within the Admin Panel. This is where you can control things like the suffix appended onto each page's title, the favicon displayed in the browser's tab, and the Open Graph data that is used when sharing the Admin Panel on social media.
+
+To customize Root Metadata, use the `admin.meta` key in your Payload Config:
+
+```ts
+{
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    meta: {
+    // highlight-end
+      title: 'My Admin Panel',
+      description: 'The best admin panel in the world',
+      icons: [
+        {
+          rel: 'icon',
+          type: 'image/png',
+          href: '/favicon.png',
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available for Root Metadata:
+
+| Key | Type | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| **`title`** | `string` | The title of the Admin Panel. |
+| **`description`** | `string` | The description of the Admin Panel. |
+| **`defaultOGImageType`** | `dynamic` (default), `static`, or `off` | The type of default OG image to use. If set to `dynamic`, Payload will use Next.js image generation to create an image with the title of the page. If set to `static`, Payload will use the `defaultOGImage` URL. If set to `off`, Payload will not generate an OG image. |
+| **`icons`** | `IconConfig[]` | An array of icon objects. [More details](#icons) |
+| **`keywords`** | `string` | A comma-separated list of keywords to include in the metadata of the Admin Panel. |
+| **`openGraph`** | `OpenGraphConfig` | An object containing Open Graph metadata. [More details](#open-graph) |
+| **`titleSuffix`** | `string` | A suffix to append to the end of the title of every page. Defaults to "- Payload". |
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  These are the _root-level_ options for the Admin Panel. You can also customize [Collection Metadata](./collections), [Global Metadata](./globals), and [Document Metadata](./documents) in their respective configs.
+</Banner>
+
+### Icons
+
+The Icons Config corresponds to the `<link>` tags that are used to specify icons for the Admin Panel. The `icons` key is an array of objects, each of which represents an individual icon. Icons are differentiated from one another by their `rel` attribute, which specifies the relationship between the document and the icon.
+
+The most common icon type is the favicon, which is displayed in the browser tab. This is specified by the `rel` attribute `icon`. Other common icon types include `apple-touch-icon`, which is used by Apple devices when the Admin Panel is saved to the home screen, and `mask-icon`, which is used by Safari to mask the Admin Panel icon.
+
+To customize icons, use the `icons` key within the `admin.meta` object in your Payload Config:
+
+```ts
+{
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    meta: {
+      // highlight-start
+      icons: [
+      // highlight-end
+        {
+          rel: 'icon',
+          type: 'image/png',
+          href: '/favicon.png',
+        },
+        {
+          rel: 'apple-touch-icon',
+          type: 'image/png',
+          href: '/apple-touch-icon.png',
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available for Icons:
+
+| Key | Type | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| **`rel`** | `string` | The HTML `rel` attribute of the icon. |
+| **`type`** | `string` | The MIME type of the icon. |
+| **`color`** | `string` | The color of the icon. |
+| **`fetchPriority`** | `string` | The [fetch priority](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/HTMLImageElement/fetchPriority) of the icon. |
+| **`media`** | `string` | The [media query](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/CSS/CSS_media_queries/Using_media_queries) of the icon. |
+| **`sizes`** | `string` | The [sizes](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/API/HTMLImageElement/sizes) of the icon. |
+| **`url`** | `string` | The URL pointing the resource of the icon. |
+
+### Open Graph
+
+Open Graph metadata is a set of tags that are used to control how URLs are displayed when shared on social media platforms. Open Graph metadata is automatically generated by Payload, but can be customized at the Root level.
+
+To customize Open Graph metadata, use the `openGraph` key within the `admin.meta` object in your Payload Config:
+
+```ts
+{
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    meta: {
+      // highlight-start
+      openGraph: {
+      // highlight-end
+        description: 'The best admin panel in the world',
+        images: [
+          {
+            url: 'https://example.com/image.jpg',
+            width: 800,
+            height: 600,
+          },
+        ],
+        siteName: 'Payload',
+        title: 'My Admin Panel',
+      },
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available for Open Graph Metadata:
+
+| Key | Type | Description |
+| --- | --- | --- |
+| **`description`** | `string` | The description of the Admin Panel. |
+| **`images`** | `OGImageConfig | OGImageConfig[]` | An array of image objects. |
+| **`siteName`** | `string` | The name of the site. |
+| **`title`** | `string` | The title of the Admin Panel. |
+
+## Collection Metadata
+
+Collection Metadata is the metadata that is applied to all pages within any given Collection within the Admin Panel. This metadata is used to customize the title and description of all views within any given Collection, unless overridden by the view itself.
+
+To customize Collection Metadata, use the `admin.meta` key within your Collection Config:
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    meta: {
+    // highlight-end
+      title: 'My Collection',
+      description: 'The best collection in the world',
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Collection Meta config has the same options as the [Root Metadata](#root-metadata) config.
+
+## Global Metadata
+
+Global Metadata is the metadata that is applied to all pages within any given Global within the Admin Panel. This metadata is used to customize the title and description of all views within any given Global, unless overridden by the view itself.
+
+To customize Global Metadata, use the `admin.meta` key within your Global Config:
+
+```ts
+import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const MyGlobal: GlobalConfig = {
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    // highlight-start
+    meta: {
+    // highlight-end
+      title: 'My Global',
+      description: 'The best
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Global Meta config has the same options as the [Root Metadata](#root-metadata) config.
+
+## View Metadata
+
+View Metadata is the metadata that is applied to specific [Views](./views) within the Admin Panel. This metadata is used to customize the title and description of a specific view, overriding any metadata set at the [Root](#root-metadata), [Collection](#collection-metadata), or [Global](#global-metadata) level.
+
+To customize View Metadata, use the `meta` key within your View Config:
+
+```ts
+{
+  // ...
+  admin: {
+    views: {
+      dashboard: {
+        // highlight-start
+        meta: {
+        // highlight-end
+          title: 'My Dashboard',
+          description: 'The best dashboard in the world',
+        }
+      },
+    },
+  },
+}

docs/admin/overview.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ desc: Manage your data and customize the Payload Admin Panel by swapping in your
 keywords: admin, components, custom, customize, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload dynamically generates a beautiful, [fully type-safe](../typescript/overview) admin panel to manage your users and data. It is highly performant, even with 100+ fields, and is translated in over 30 languages. Within the Admin Panel you can manage content, [render your site](../live-preview/overview), preview drafts, [diff versions](../versions/overview), and so much more.
+Payload dynamically generates a beautiful, [fully type-safe](../typescript/overview) Admin Panel to manage your users and data. It is highly performant, even with 100+ fields, and is translated in over 30 languages. Within the Admin Panel you can manage content, [render your site](../live-preview/overview), preview drafts, [diff versions](../versions/overview), and so much more.
 
 The Admin Panel is designed to [white-label your brand](https://payloadcms.com/blog/white-label-admin-ui). You can endlessly customize and extend the Admin UI by swapping in your own [Custom Components](./components)—everything from simple field labels to entire views can be modified or replaced to perfectly tailor the interface for your editors.
 
@@ -55,6 +55,11 @@ As shown above, all Payload routes are nested within the `(payload)` route group
 
 The `admin` directory contains all the _pages_ related to the interface itself, whereas the `api` and `graphql` directories contains all the _routes_ related to the [REST API](../rest-api/overview) and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview). All admin routes are [easily configurable](#customizing-routes) to meet your application's exact requirements.
 
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  If you don't use the [REST API](../rest/overview) or [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview), you can delete the [Next.js files corresponding to those routes](../admin/overview#project-structure), however, the overhead of this API is completely constrained to these endpoints, and will not slow down or affect Payload outside of the endpoints.
+</Banner>
+
 Finally, the `custom.scss` file is where you can add or override globally-oriented styles in the Admin Panel, such as modify the color palette. Customizing the look and feel through CSS alone is a powerful feature of the Admin Panel, [more on that here](./customizing-css).
 
 All auto-generated files will contain the following comments at the top of each file:
@@ -81,23 +86,24 @@ const config = buildConfig({
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Option            | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
-| ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `user`            | The `slug` of the Collection that you want to allow to login to the Admin Panel. [More details](#the-admin-user-collection).                                                                                                                                                        |
-| `buildPath`       | Specify an absolute path for where to store the built Admin bundle used in production. Defaults to `path.resolve(process.cwd(), 'build')`.                                                                                                                                  |
-| `meta`            | Base metadata to use for the Admin Panel. Included properties are `titleSuffix`, `icons`, and `openGraph`. Can be overridden on a per Collection or per Global basis.                                                                                                       |
-| `disable`         | If set to `true`, the entire Admin Panel will be disabled.                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| `dateFormat`      | The date format that will be used for all dates within the Admin Panel. Any valid [date-fns](https://date-fns.org/) format pattern can be used.                                                                                                                             |
-| `avatar`          | Set account profile picture. Options: `gravatar`, `default` or a custom React component.                                                                                                                                                                                    |
-| `autoLogin`       | Used to automate admin log-in for dev and demonstration convenience. [More details](../authentication/config).                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| `livePreview`     | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                                                                                                                                       |
-| `components`      | Component overrides that affect the entirety of the Admin Panel. [More details](./components).                                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| `routes`          | Replace built-in Admin Panel routes with your own custom routes. [More details](#customizing-routes).                                                                                                                                                                               |
-| `custom`          | Any custom properties you wish to pass to the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                                                                                                                  |
+| Option        | Description                                                                                                                                                           |
+|---------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`avatar`**      | Set account profile picture. Options: `gravatar`, `default` or a custom React component.                                                                              |
+| **`autoLogin`**   | Used to automate log-in for dev and demonstration convenience. [More details](../authentication/overview).                                                            |
+| **`buildPath`**   | Specify an absolute path for where to store the built Admin bundle used in production. Defaults to `path.resolve(process.cwd(), 'build')`.                            |
+| **`components`**  | Component overrides that affect the entirety of the Admin Panel. [More details](./components).                                                                        |
+| **`custom`**      | Any custom properties you wish to pass to the Admin Panel.                                                                                                            |
+| **`dateFormat`**  | The date format that will be used for all dates within the Admin Panel. Any valid [date-fns](https://date-fns.org/) format pattern can be used.                       |
+| **`disable`**     | If set to `true`, the entire Admin Panel will be disabled.                                                                                                            |
+| **`livePreview`** | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                         |
+| **`meta`**        | Base metadata to use for the Admin Panel. [More details](./metadata). |
+| **`routes`**      | Replace built-in Admin Panel routes with your own custom routes. [More details](#customizing-routes).                                                                 |
+| **`theme`**       | Restrict the Admin Panel theme to use only one of your choice. Default is `all`.
+| **`user`**        | The `slug` of the Collection that you want to allow to login to the Admin Panel. [More details](#the-admin-user-collection).                                          |
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  These are the _root-level_ options for the Admin Panel. You can also customize the admin options for _Collections and Globals_ through their respective `admin` keys.
+  These are the _root-level_ options for the Admin Panel. You can also customize [Collection Admin Options](./collections) and [Global Admin Options](./globals) through their respective `admin` keys.
 </Banner>
 
 ### The Admin User Collection
@@ -132,7 +138,7 @@ To do this, specify `admin: { user: 'admins' }` in your config. This will provid
 
 ### Role-based Access Control
 
-It is also possible to allow multiple user types into the Admin Panel with limited permissions. For example, you may wish to have two roles within the `admins` Collection:
+It is also possible to allow multiple user types into the Admin Panel with limited permissions, known as role-based access control (RBAC). For example, you may wish to have two roles within the `admins` Collection:
 
 - `super-admin` - full access to the Admin Panel to perform any action
 - `editor` - limited access to the Admin Panel to only manage content
@@ -162,21 +168,34 @@ const config = buildConfig({
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Option             | Default route           | Description                           |
-| ------------------ | ----------------------- | ------------------------------------- |
-| `admin`            | `/admin`                | The Admin Panel itself.               |
-| `api`              | `/api`                  | The [REST API](../rest-api/overview) base path.               |
-| `graphQL`          | `/graphql`              | The [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) base path.            |
-| `graphQLPlayground`| `/graphql-playground`   | The GraphQL Playground.               |
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Warning:</strong>
-  Changing Root-level Routes _after_ your project was generated will also require you to manually update the corresponding directories in your project. For example, changing `routes.admin` will require you to rename the `(payload)/admin` directory in your project to match the new route. [More details](#project-structure).
-</Banner>
+| Option              | Default route         | Description                                       |
+|---------------------|-----------------------|---------------------------------------------------|
+| `admin`             | `/admin`              | The Admin Panel itself.                           |
+| `api`               | `/api`                | The [REST API](../rest-api/overview) base path.   |
+| `graphQL`           | `/graphql`            | The [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) base path. |
+| `graphQLPlayground` | `/graphql-playground` | The GraphQL Playground.                           |
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-   You can easily add _new_ routes to the Admin Panel through the `endpoints` property of the Payload Config. See [Custom Endpoints](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints) for more information.
+   You can easily add _new_ routes to the Admin Panel through [Custom Endpoints](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints) and [Custom Views](./views).
+</Banner>
+
+#### Customizing Root-level Routes
+
+You can change the Root-level Routes as needed, such as to mount the Admin Panel at the root of your application.
+
+Changing Root-level Routes also requires a change to [Project Structure](#project-structure) to match the new route. For example, if you set `routes.admin` to `/`, you would need to completely remove the `admin` directory from the project structure:
+
+```plaintext
+app/
+├─ (payload)/
+├── [[...segments]]/
+├──── ...
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  If you set Root-level Routes _before_ auto-generating the Admin Panel, your [Project Structure](#project-structure) will already be set up correctly.
 </Banner>
 
 ### Admin-level Routes

docs/admin/preferences.mdx

@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 ---
 title: Managing User Preferences
 label: Preferences
-order: 50
+order: 70
 desc: Store the preferences of your users as they interact with the Admin Panel.
 keywords: admin, preferences, custom, customize, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Out of the box, Payload handles the persistence of your users' preferences in a
   that is reading or setting a preference via all provided authentication methods.
 </Banner>
 
-## Use cases
+## Use Cases
 
 This API is used significantly for internal operations of the Admin Panel, as mentioned above. But, if you're building your own React components for use in the Admin Panel, you can allow users to set their own preferences in correspondence to their usage of your components. For example:
 

docs/admin/views.mdx

@@ -1,14 +1,14 @@
 ---
 title: Customizing Views
 label: Customizing Views
-order: 30
+order: 50
 desc:
 keywords:
 ---
 
 Views are the individual pages that make up the [Admin Panel](./overview), such as the Dashboard, List, and Edit views. One of the most powerful ways to customize the Admin Panel is to create Custom Views. These are [Custom Components](./components) that can either replace built-in views or can be entirely new.
 
-Within the Admin Panel, there are four types of views:
+There are four types of views within the Admin Panel:
 
 - [Root Views](#root-views)
 - [Collection Views](#collection-views)
@@ -31,31 +31,70 @@ const config = buildConfig({
   admin: {
     components: {
       views: {
-        Dashboard: MyCustomDashboardView, // highlight-line
+        customView: {
+          Component: '/path/to/MyCustomView#MyCustomView', // highlight-line
+          path: '/my-custom-view',
+        }
       },
     },
   },
 })
 ```
 
-_For details on how to build Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
+Your Custom Root Views can optionally use one of the templates that Payload provides. The most common of these is the Default Template which provides the basic layout and navigation. Here is an example of what that might look like:
+
+```tsx
+import type { AdminViewProps } from 'payload'
+
+import { DefaultTemplate } from '@payloadcms/next/templates'
+import { Gutter } from '@payloadcms/ui'
+import React from 'react'
+
+export const MyCustomView: React.FC<AdminViewProps> = ({
+  initPageResult,
+  params,
+  searchParams,
+}) => {
+  return (
+    <DefaultTemplate
+      i18n={initPageResult.req.i18n}
+      locale={initPageResult.locale}
+      params={params}
+      payload={initPageResult.req.payload}
+      permissions={initPageResult.permissions}
+      searchParams={searchParams}
+      user={initPageResult.req.user || undefined}
+      visibleEntities={initPageResult.visibleEntities}
+    >
+      <Gutter>
+        <h1>Custom Default Root View</h1>
+        <br />
+        <p>This view uses the Default Template.</p>
+      </Gutter>
+    </DefaultTemplate>
+  )
+}
+```
+
+_For details on how to build Custom Views, including all available props, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
 
 The following options are available:
 
 | Property        | Description                                                                   |
 | --------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`Account`**   | The Account view is used to show the currently logged in user's Account page. |
-| **`Dashboard`** | The main landing page of the [Admin Panel](./overview).                                     |
+| **`account`**   | The Account view is used to show the currently logged in user's Account page. |
+| **`dashboard`** | The main landing page of the [Admin Panel](./overview).                                     |
 
 For more granular control, pass a configuration object instead. Payload exposes the following properties for each view:
 
 | Property           | Description                                                                                                                                                                                |
 | ------------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
-| **`Component`** \* | Pass in the component that should be rendered when a user navigates to this route.                                                                                                         |
+| **`Component`** \* | Pass in the component path that should be rendered when a user navigates to this route.                                                                                                         |
 | **`path`** \*      | Any valid URL path or array of paths that [`path-to-regexp`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/path-to-regex) understands.                                                                     |
 | **`exact`**        | Boolean. When true, will only match if the path matches the `usePathname()` exactly.                                                                                                     |
 | **`strict`**       | When true, a path that has a trailing slash will only match a `location.pathname` with a trailing slash. This has no effect when there are additional URL segments in the pathname. |
-| **`sensitive`**    | When true, will match if the path is case sensitive.                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`sensitive`**    | When true, will match if the path is case sensitive.
+| **`meta`**         | Page metadata overrides to apply to this view within the Admin Panel. [More details](./metadata).                                                                           |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -72,9 +111,9 @@ const config = buildConfig({
     components: {
       views: {
         // highlight-start
-        MyCustomView: {
+        myCustomView: {
         // highlight-end
-          Component: MyCustomView,
+          Component: '/path/to/MyCustomView#MyCustomViewComponent',
           path: '/my-custom-view',
         },
       },
@@ -108,26 +147,41 @@ export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
   admin: {
     components: {
       views: {
-        Edit: MyCustomEditView, // highlight-line
+        edit: {
+          root: {
+            Component: '/path/to/MyCustomEditView', // highlight-line
+          }
+          // other options include:
+          // default
+          // versions
+          // version
+          // api
+          // livePreview
+          // [key: string]
+          // See "Document Views" for more details
+        },
+        list: {
+          Component: '/path/to/MyCustomListView',
+        }
       },
     },
   },
 }
 ```
 
-_For details on how to build Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
+_For details on how to build Custom Views, including all available props, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Note:</strong>
-  The `Edit` property will replace the _entire_ Edit View, including the title, tabs, etc., _as well as all nested [Document Views](#document-views)_, such as the API, Live Preview, and Version views. To replace only the Edit View precisely, use the `Edit.Default` key instead.
+  The `root` property will replace the _entire_ Edit View, including the title, tabs, etc., _as well as all nested [Document Views](#document-views)_, such as the API, Live Preview, and Version views. To replace only the Edit View precisely, use the `edit.default` key instead.
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
 
 | Property   | Description                                                                                                       |
 | ---------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`Edit`** | The Edit View is used to edit a single document for any given Collection. [More details](#document-views).     |
-| **`List`** | The List View is used to show a list of documents for any given Collection.                                         |
+| **`edit`** | The Edit View is used to edit a single document for any given Collection. [More details](#document-views).     |
+| **`list`** | The List View is used to show a list of documents for any given Collection.                                         |
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Note:</strong>
@@ -148,25 +202,36 @@ export const MyGlobalConfig: SanitizedGlobalConfig = {
   admin: {
     components: {
       views: {
-        Edit: MyCustomEditView, // highlight-line
+        edit: {
+          root: {
+            Component: '/path/to/MyCustomEditView', // highlight-line
+          }
+          // other options include:
+          // default
+          // versions
+          // version
+          // api
+          // livePreview
+          // [key: string]
+        },
       },
     },
   },
-})
+}
 ```
 
-_For details on how to build Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
+_For details on how to build Custom Views, including all available props, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Note:</strong>
-  The `Edit` property will replace the _entire_ Edit View, including the title, tabs, etc., _as well as all nested [Document Views](#document-views)_, such as the API, Live Preview, and Version views. To replace only the Edit View precisely, use the `Edit.Default` key instead.
+  The `root` property will replace the _entire_ Edit View, including the title, tabs, etc., _as well as all nested [Document Views](#document-views)_, such as the API, Live Preview, and Version views. To replace only the Edit View precisely, use the `edit.default` key instead.
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
 
 | Property   | Description                                                         |
 | ---------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`Edit`** | The Edit View is used to edit a single document for any given Global. [More details](#document-views). |
+| **`edit`** | The Edit View is used to edit a single document for any given Global. [More details](#document-views). |
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Note:</strong>
@@ -187,37 +252,38 @@ export const MyCollectionOrGlobalConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
   admin: {
     components: {
       views: {
-        Edit: {
-          API: {
-            Component: MyCustomAPIView, // highlight-line
+        edit: {
+          api: {
+            Component: '/path/to/MyCustomAPIViewComponent', // highlight-line
           },
         },
       },
     },
   },
-})
+}
 ```
 
-_For details on how to build Custom Views, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
+_For details on how to build Custom Views, including all available props, see [Building Custom Views](#building-custom-views)._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
  <strong>Note:</strong>
- If you need to replace the _entire_ Edit View, including _all_ nested Document Views, use the `Edit` key itself. See [Custom Collection Views](#collection-views) or [Custom Global Views](#global-views) for more information.
+ If you need to replace the _entire_ Edit View, including _all_ nested Document Views, use the `root` key. See [Custom Collection Views](#collection-views) or [Custom Global Views](#global-views) for more information.
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
 
 | Property          | Description                                                                                                                 |
 | ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`Default`**     | The Default view is the primary view in which your document is edited.                                                      |
-| **`Versions`**    | The Versions view is used to view the version history of a single document. [More details](../versions).                    |
-| **`Version`**     | The Version view is used to view a single version of a single document for a given collection. [More details](../versions). |
-| **`API`**         | The API view is used to display the REST API JSON response for a given document.                                            |
-| **`LivePreview`** | The LivePreview view is used to display the Live Preview interface. [More details](../live-preview).                        |
+| **`root`**        | The Root View overrides all other nested views and routes. No document controls or tabs are rendered when this key is set.  |
+| **`default`**     | The Default View is the primary view in which your document is edited. It is rendered within the "Edit" tab.     |
+| **`versions`**    | The Versions View is used to navigate the version history of a single document. It is rendered within the "Versions" tab. [More details](../versions).                    |
+| **`version`**     | The Version View is used to edit a single version of a document. It is rendered within the "Version" tab. [More details](../versions). |
+| **`api`**         | The API View is used to display the REST API JSON response for a given document. It is rendered within the "API" tab.                                            |
+| **`livePreview`** | The LivePreview view is used to display the Live Preview interface. It is rendered within the "Live Preview" tab. [More details](../live-preview).                        |
 
 ### Document Tabs
 
-Each Document View can be given a new tab in the Edit View, if desired. Tabs are highly configurable, from as simple as changing the label to swapping out the entire component, they can be modified in any way. To add or customize tabs in the Edit View, use the `Component.Tab` key:
+Each Document View can be given a new tab in the Edit View, if desired. Tabs are highly configurable, from as simple as changing the label to swapping out the entire component, they can be modified in any way. To add or customize tabs in the Edit View, use the `tab` key:
 
 ```ts
 import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -227,17 +293,19 @@ export const MyCollection: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
   admin: {
     components: {
       views: {
-        Edit: {
-          MyCustomTab: {
-            Component: MyCustomTab,
+        edit: {
+          myCustomTab: {
+            Component: '/path/to/MyCustomTab',
             path: '/my-custom-tab',
-            Tab: MyCustomTab // highlight-line
+            tab: {
+              Component: '/path/to/MyCustomTabComponent' // highlight-line
+            }
           },
-          AnotherCustomView: {
-            Component: AnotherCustomView,
+          anotherCustomTab: {
+            Component: '/path/to/AnotherCustomView',
             path: '/another-custom-view',
             // highlight-start
-            Tab: {
+            tab: {
               label: 'Another Custom View',
               href: '/another-custom-view',
             }
@@ -261,14 +329,15 @@ Custom Views are just [Custom Components](./components) rendered at the page-lev
 
 ```ts
 import type { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-import { MyCustomView } from './MyCustomView'
 
 export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
   // ...
   admin: {
     components: {
       views: {
-        Edit: MyCustomView, // highlight-line
+        edit: {
+          Component: '/path/to/MyCustomView' // highlight-line
+        }
       },
     },
   },
@@ -278,14 +347,12 @@ export const MyCollectionConfig: SanitizedCollectionConfig = {
 Your Custom Views will be provided with the following props:
 
 | Prop                      | Description                                                                                                                            |
-| ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |                                                                                            |
-| **`user`**                    | The currently logged in user.                                                                                                          |
-| **`locale`**                  | The current [Locale](../configuration/localization) of the [Admin Panel](./overview).                                                  |
-| **`navGroups`**               | The grouped navigation items according to `admin.group` in your [Collection Config](../collections/overview) or [Global Config](../globals/overview). |
-| **`params`**                  | An object containing the [Dynamic Route Parameters](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing/dynamic-routes).     |
-| **`permissions`**             | The permissions of the currently logged in user.                                                                                       |
-| **`searchParams`**            | An object containing the [Search Parameters](https://developer.mozilla.org/docs/Learn/Common_questions/What_is_a_URL#parameters).      |
-| **`visibleEntities`**         | The current user's visible entities according to your [Access Control](../access-control/overview).                                    |
+| ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`initPageResult`**      | An object containing `req`, `payload`, `permissions`, etc.                                                                  |
+| **`clientConfig`**        | The Client Config object. [More details](../components#accessing-the-payload-config).                                                             |
+| **`importMap`**           | The import map object.                                                        |
+| **`params`**              | An object containing the [Dynamic Route Parameters](https://nextjs.org/docs/app/building-your-application/routing/dynamic-routes).     |
+| **`searchParams`**        | An object containing the [Search Parameters](https://developer.mozilla.org/docs/Learn/Common_questions/What_is_a_URL#parameters).      |
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Reminder:</strong>

docs/authentication/api-keys.mdx

@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ your API keys will not be.
 
 ### HTTP Authentication
 
-To authenticate REST or GraphQL API requests using an API key, set the `Authorization` header. The header is case-sensitive and needs the slug of the `auth.useAPIKey` enabled collection, then " API-Key ", followed by the `apiKey` that has been assigned. Payload's built-in middleware will then assign the user document to `req.user` and handle requests with the proper access control. By doing this, Payload recognizes the request being made as a request by the user associated with that API key.
+To authenticate REST or GraphQL API requests using an API key, set the `Authorization` header. The header is case-sensitive and needs the slug of the `auth.useAPIKey` enabled collection, then " API-Key ", followed by the `apiKey` that has been assigned. Payload's built-in middleware will then assign the user document to `req.user` and handle requests with the proper [Access Control](../access-control/overview). By doing this, Payload recognizes the request being made as a request by the user associated with that API key.
 
 **For example, using Fetch:**
 
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ const response = await fetch('http://localhost:3000/api/pages', {
 })
 ```
 
-Payload ensures that the same, uniform access control is used across all authentication strategies. This enables you to utilize your existing access control configurations with both API keys and the standard email/password authentication. This consistency can aid in maintaining granular control over your API keys.
+Payload ensures that the same, uniform [Access Control](../access-control/overview) is used across all authentication strategies. This enables you to utilize your existing Access Control configurations with both API keys and the standard email/password authentication. This consistency can aid in maintaining granular control over your API keys.
 
 ### API Key Only Auth
 

docs/authentication/config.mdx

@@ -1,206 +0,0 @@
----
-title: Authentication Config
-label: Config
-order: 20
-desc: Enable and customize options in the Authentication config for features including Forgot Password, Login Attempts, API key usage and more.
-keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
----
-
-Payload's Authentication is extremely powerful and gives you everything you need when you go to build a new app or site in a secure and responsible manner.
-
-To enable Authentication on a collection, define an `auth` property and set it to either `true` or to an object containing the options below.
-
-## Options
-
-| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
-|----------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`useAPIKey`**            | Payload Authentication provides for API keys to be set on each user within an Authentication-enabled Collection. [More](/docs/authentication/config#api-keys)                                                                       |
-| **`tokenExpiration`**      | How long (in seconds) to keep the user logged in. JWTs and HTTP-only cookies will both expire at the same time.                                                                                                                     |
-| **`maxLoginAttempts`**     | Only allow a user to attempt logging in X amount of times. Automatically locks out a user from authenticating if this limit is passed. Set to `0` to disable.                                                                       |
-| **`lockTime`**             | Set the time (in milliseconds) that a user should be locked out if they fail authentication more times than `maxLoginAttempts` allows for.                                                                                          |
-| **`depth`**                | How many levels deep a `user` document should be populated when creating the JWT and binding the `user` to the `req`. Defaults to `0` and should only be modified if absolutely necessary, as this will affect performance. |
-| **`cookies`**              | Set cookie options, including `secure`, `sameSite`, and `domain`. For advanced users.                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`forgotPassword`**       | Customize the way that the `forgotPassword` operation functions. [More](/docs/authentication/config#forgot-password)                                                                                                                |
-| **`verify`**               | Set to `true` or pass an object with verification options to require users to verify by email before they are allowed to log into your app. [More](/docs/authentication/config#email-verification)                                  |
-| **`disableLocalStrategy`** | Advanced - disable Payload's built-in local auth strategy. Only use this property if you have replaced Payload's auth mechanisms with your own.                                                                                     |
-| **`strategies`**           | Advanced - an array of custom authentification strategies to extend this collection's authentication with. [More](/docs/authentication/custom-strategies)                                                                         |
-
-### Forgot Password
-
-You can customize how the Forgot Password workflow operates with the following options on the `auth.forgotPassword` property:
-
-**`generateEmailHTML`**
-
-Function that accepts one argument, containing `{ req, token, user }`, that allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users attempting to reset their password. The function should return a string that supports HTML, which can be a full HTML email.
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  HTML templating can be used to create custom email templates, inline CSS automatically, and more.
-  You can make a reusable function that standardizes all email sent from Payload, which makes
-  sending custom emails more DRY. Payload doesn't ship with an HTML templating engine, so you are
-  free to choose your own.
-</Banner>
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'customers',
-  auth: {
-    forgotPassword: {
-      // highlight-start
-      generateEmailHTML: ({ req, token, user }) => {
-        // Use the token provided to allow your user to reset their password
-        const resetPasswordURL = `https://yourfrontend.com/reset-password?token=${token}`
-
-        return `
-          <!doctype html>
-          <html>
-            <body>
-              <h1>Here is my custom email template!</h1>
-              <p>Hello, ${user.email}!</p>
-              <p>Click below to reset your password.</p>
-              <p>
-                <a href="${resetPasswordURL}">${resetPasswordURL}</a>
-              </p>
-            </body>
-          </html>
-        `
-      },
-      // highlight-end
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  If you specify a different URL to send your users to for resetting their password, such as a page
-  on the frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or
-  GraphQL reset-password operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for
-  you. Above, it was passed via query parameter.
-</Banner>
-
-**`generateEmailSubject`**
-
-Similarly to the above `generateEmailHTML`, you can also customize the subject of the email. The function argument are the same but you can only return a string - not HTML.
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-{
-  slug: 'customers',
-  auth: {
-    forgotPassword: {
-      // highlight-start
-      generateEmailSubject: ({ req, user }) => {
-        return `Hey ${user.email}, reset your password!`;
-      }
-      // highlight-end
-    }
-  }
-}
-```
-
-### Email Verification
-
-If you'd like to require email verification before a user can successfully log in, you can enable it by passing `true` or an `options` object to `auth.verify`. The following options are available:
-
-**`generateEmailHTML`**
-
-Function that accepts one argument, containing `{ req, token, user }`, that allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users indicating how to validate their account. The function should return a string that supports HTML, which can optionally be a full HTML email.
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'customers',
-  auth: {
-    verify: {
-      // highlight-start
-      generateEmailHTML: ({ req, token, user }) => {
-        // Use the token provided to allow your user to verify their account
-        const url = `https://yourfrontend.com/verify?token=${token}`
-
-        return `Hey ${user.email}, verify your email by clicking here: ${url}`
-      },
-      // highlight-end
-    },
-  },
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
-  If you specify a different URL to send your users to for email verification, such as a page on the
-  frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or GraphQL
-  verification operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for you.
-  Above, it was passed via query parameter.
-</Banner>
-
-**`generateEmailSubject`**
-
-Similarly to the above `generateEmailHTML`, you can also customize the subject of the email. The function argument are the same but you can only return a string - not HTML.
-
-Example:
-
-```ts
-{
-  slug: 'customers',
-  auth: {
-    forgotPassword: {
-      // highlight-start
-      generateEmailSubject: ({ req, user }) => {
-        return `Hey ${user.email}, reset your password!`;
-      }
-      // highlight-end
-    }
-  }
-}
-```
-
-### Admin autologin
-
-For testing and demo purposes you may want to skip forcing the admin user to login in order to access the panel.
-The `admin.autologin` property is used to configure the how visitors are handled when accessing the admin panel.
-The default is that all users will have to login and this should not be enabled for environments where data needs to protected.
-
-#### autoLogin Options
-
-| Option            | Description                                                                                                     |
-| ----------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`email`**       | The email address of the user to login as                                                                       |
-| **`password`**    | The password of the user to login as                                                                            |
-| **`prefillOnly`** | If set to true, the login credentials will be prefilled but the user will still need to click the login button. |
-
-The recommended way to use this feature is behind an environment variable to ensure it is disabled when in production.
-
-**Example:**
-
-```ts
-export default buildConfig({
-  admin: {
-    user: 'users',
-    // highlight-start
-    autoLogin:
-      process.env.PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_ENABLE_AUTOLOGIN === 'true'
-        ? {
-            email: 'test@example.com',
-            password: 'test',
-            prefillOnly: true,
-          }
-        : false,
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-  collections: [
-    /** */
-  ],
-})
-```

docs/authentication/cookies.mdx

@@ -1,19 +1,16 @@
 ---
 title: Cookie Strategy
 label: Cookie Strategy
-order: 30
+order: 40
 desc: Enable HTTP Cookie based authentication to interface with Payload.
 keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload `login`, `logout`, and `refresh` operations make use of HTTP-only cookies for authentication purposes.
+Payload offers the ability to [Authenticate](./overview) via HTTP-only cookies. These can be read from the responses of `login`, `logout`, `refresh`, and `me` auth operations.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  You can access the logged-in user from access control functions and hooks from the `req.user` property.
-  <br />
-  [Learn more about token data](/docs/authentication/token-data).
+  You can access the logged-in user from within [Access Control](../access-control/overview) and [Hooks](../hooks/overview) through the `req.user` argument. [More details](./token-data).
 </Banner>
 
 ### Automatic browser inclusion
@@ -38,7 +35,6 @@ For more about including cookies in requests from your app to your Payload API,
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
   To make sure you have a Payload cookie set properly in your browser after logging in, you can use
   the browsers Developer Tools > Application > Cookies > [your-domain-here]. The Developer tools
   will still show HTTP-only cookies.
@@ -65,7 +61,7 @@ In this scenario, if your cookie was still valid, malicious-intent.com would be
 
 ### CSRF Prevention
 
-Define domains that your trust and are willing to accept Payload HTTP-only cookie based requests from. Use the `csrf` option on the base Payload config to do this:
+Define domains that your trust and are willing to accept Payload HTTP-only cookie based requests from. Use the `csrf` option on the base Payload Config to do this:
 
 ```ts
 // payload.config.ts
@@ -89,3 +85,47 @@ const config = buildConfig({
 
 export default config
 ```
+
+#### Cross domain authentication
+
+If your frontend is on a different domain than your Payload API then you will not be able to use HTTP-only cookies for authentication by default as they will be considered third-party cookies by the browser.
+There are a few strategies to get around this:
+
+##### 1. Use subdomains
+
+Cookies can cross subdomains without being considered third party cookies, for example if your API is at api.example.com then you can authenticate from example.com.
+
+##### 2. Configure cookies
+
+If option 1 isn't possible, then you can get around this limitation by [configuring your cookies](https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/authentication/overview#config-options) on your authentication collection to achieve the following setup:
+
+```
+SameSite: None // allows the cookie to cross domains
+Secure: true // ensures its sent over HTTPS only
+HttpOnly: true // ensures its not accessible via client side JavaScript
+```
+
+Configuration example:
+
+```ts
+{
+  slug: 'users',
+  auth: {
+    cookies: {
+      sameSite: 'None',
+      secure: true,
+    }
+  },
+  fields: [
+    // your auth fields here
+  ]
+},
+```
+
+If you're configuring [cors](https://payloadcms.com/docs/beta/production/preventing-abuse#cross-origin-resource-sharing-cors) in your Payload config, you won't be able to use a wildcard anymore, you'll need to specify the list of allowed domains.
+
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Good to know:</strong>
+  Setting up <code>secure: true</code> will not work if you're developing on <code>http://localhost</code> or any non-https domain. For local development you should conditionally set this to <code>false</code> based on the environment.
+</Banner>

docs/authentication/custom-strategies.mdx

@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ keywords: authentication, config, configuration, overview, documentation, Conten
 
 ### Creating a strategy
 
-At the core, a strategy is a way to authenticate a user making a request. As of `3.0` we moved away from passportJS in favor of pulling back the curtain and putting you in full control.
+At the core, a strategy is a way to authenticate a user making a request. As of `3.0` we moved away from [Passport](https://www.passportjs.org) in favor of pulling back the curtain and putting you in full control.
 
 A strategy is made up of the following:
 

docs/authentication/email.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,203 @@
+---
+title: Authentication Emails
+label: Email Verification
+order: 30
+desc: Email Verification allows users to verify their email address before they're account is fully activated. Email Verification ties directly into the Email functionality that Payload provides.
+keywords: authentication, email, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+[Authentication](./overview) ties directly into the [Email](../email) functionality that Payload provides. This allows you to send emails to users for verification, password resets, and more. While Payload provides default email templates for these actions, you can customize them to fit your brand.
+
+## Email Verification
+
+Email Verification forces users to prove they have access to the email address they can authenticate. This will help to reduce spam accounts and ensure that users are who they say they are.
+
+To enable Email Verification, use the `auth.verify` property on your [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    verify: true // highlight-line
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Verification emails are fully customizable. [More details](#generateEmailHTML).
+</Banner>
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
+|----------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`generateEmailHTML`** | Allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users indicating how to validate their account. [More details](#generateEmailHTML). |
+| **`generateEmailSubject`** | Allows for overriding the subject of the email that is sent to users indicating how to validate their account. [More details](#generateEmailSubject). |
+
+#### generateEmailHTML
+
+Function that accepts one argument, containing `{ req, token, user }`, that allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users indicating how to validate their account. The function should return a string that supports HTML, which can optionally be a full HTML email.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    verify: {
+      // highlight-start
+      generateEmailHTML: ({ req, token, user }) => {
+        // Use the token provided to allow your user to verify their account
+        const url = `https://yourfrontend.com/verify?token=${token}`
+
+        return `Hey ${user.email}, verify your email by clicking here: ${url}`
+      },
+      // highlight-end
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  If you specify a different URL to send your users to for email verification, such as a page on the
+  frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or GraphQL
+  verification operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for you.
+  Above, it was passed via query parameter.
+</Banner>
+
+#### generateEmailSubject
+
+Similarly to the above `generateEmailHTML`, you can also customize the subject of the email. The function argument are the same but you can only return a string - not HTML.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    verify: {
+      // highlight-start
+      generateEmailSubject: ({ req, user }) => {
+        return `Hey ${user.email}, reset your password!`;
+      }
+      // highlight-end
+    }
+  }
+}
+```
+
+## Forgot Password
+
+You can customize how the Forgot Password workflow operates with the following options on the `auth.forgotPassword` property:
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    forgotPassword: { // highlight-line
+      // ...
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option               | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
+|----------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`generateEmailHTML`** | Allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users attempting to reset their password. [More details](#generateEmailHTML). |
+| **`generateEmailSubject`** | Allows for overriding the subject of the email that is sent to users attempting to reset their password. [More details](#generateEmailSubject). |
+
+#### generateEmailHTML
+
+This function allows for overriding the HTML within emails that are sent to users attempting to reset their password. The function should return a string that supports HTML, which can be a full HTML email.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    forgotPassword: {
+      // highlight-start
+      generateEmailHTML: ({ req, token, user }) => {
+        // Use the token provided to allow your user to reset their password
+        const resetPasswordURL = `https://yourfrontend.com/reset-password?token=${token}`
+
+        return `
+          <!doctype html>
+          <html>
+            <body>
+              <h1>Here is my custom email template!</h1>
+              <p>Hello, ${user.email}!</p>
+              <p>Click below to reset your password.</p>
+              <p>
+                <a href="${resetPasswordURL}">${resetPasswordURL}</a>
+              </p>
+            </body>
+          </html>
+        `
+      },
+      // highlight-end
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  If you specify a different URL to send your users to for resetting their password, such as a page
+  on the frontend of your app or similar, you need to handle making the call to the Payload REST or
+  GraphQL reset-password operation yourself on your frontend, using the token that was provided for
+  you. Above, it was passed via query parameter.
+</Banner>
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  HTML templating can be used to create custom email templates, inline CSS automatically, and more.
+  You can make a reusable function that standardizes all email sent from Payload, which makes
+  sending custom emails more DRY. Payload doesn't ship with an HTML templating engine, so you are
+  free to choose your own.
+</Banner>
+
+The following arguments are passed to the `generateEmailHTML` function:
+
+| Argument | Description                                                                                   |
+|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `req`    | The request object.                                                                           |
+| `token`  | The token that is generated for the user to reset their password.                             |
+| `user`   | The user document that is attempting to reset their password.                                 |
+
+#### generateEmailSubject
+
+Similarly to the above `generateEmailHTML`, you can also customize the subject of the email. The function argument are the same but you can only return a string - not HTML.
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Customers: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: {
+    forgotPassword: {
+      // highlight-start
+      generateEmailSubject: ({ req, user }) => {
+        return `Hey ${user.email}, reset your password!`;
+      }
+      // highlight-end
+    }
+  }
+}
+```
+
+The following arguments are passed to the `generateEmailSubject` function:
+
+| Argument | Description                                                                                   |
+|----------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| `req`    | The request object.                                                                           |
+| `user`   | The user document that is attempting to reset their password.                                 |

docs/authentication/jwt.mdx

@@ -6,14 +6,11 @@ desc: Enable JSON Web Token based authentication to interface with Payload.
 keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload offers the ability to authenticate via `JWT` (JSON web token). These can be read from the responses of `login`, `refresh`, and `me` auth operations.
+Payload offers the ability to [Authenticate](./overview) via JSON Web Tokens (JWT). These can be read from the responses of `login`, `logout`, `refresh`, and `me` auth operations.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  You can access the logged-in user from access control functions and hooks from the `req.user` property.
-  <br />
-  [Learn more about token data](/docs/authentication/token-data).
+  You can access the logged-in user from within [Access Control](../access-control/overview) and [Hooks](../hooks/overview) through the `req.user` argument. [More details](./token-data).
 </Banner>
 
 ### Identifying Users Via The Authorization Header

docs/authentication/operations.mdx

@@ -1,16 +1,16 @@
 ---
 title: Authentication Operations
 label: Operations
-order: 80
+order: 20
 desc: Enabling Authentication automatically makes key operations available such as Login, Logout, Verify, Unlock, Reset Password and more.
 keywords: authentication, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Enabling Authentication on a Collection automatically exposes additional auth-based operations in the Local, REST, and GraphQL APIs.
+Enabling [Authentication](./overview) on a [Collection](../configuration/collections) automatically exposes additional auth-based operations in the [Local API](../local-api/overview), [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview).
 
 ## Access
 
-The Access operation returns what a logged in user can and can't do with the collections and globals that are registered via your config. This data can be immensely helpful if your app needs to show and hide certain features based on access control, as the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) does.
+The Access operation returns what a logged in user can and can't do with the collections and globals that are registered via your config. This data can be immensely helpful if your app needs to show and hide certain features based on [Access Control](../access-control/overview), just as the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) does.
 
 **REST API endpoint**:
 
@@ -308,7 +308,7 @@ Payload comes with built-in forgot password functionality. Submitting an email a
 
 The link to reset the user's password contains a token which is what allows the user to securely reset their password.
 
-By default, the Forgot Password operations send users to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) to reset their password, but you can customize the generated email to send users to the frontend of your app instead by [overriding the email HTML](/docs/authentication/config#forgot-password).
+By default, the Forgot Password operations send users to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) to reset their password, but you can customize the generated email to send users to the frontend of your app instead by [overriding the email HTML](/docs/authentication/overview#forgot-password).
 
 **Example REST API Forgot Password**:
 

docs/authentication/overview.mdx

@@ -11,38 +11,47 @@ keywords: authentication, config, configuration, overview, documentation, Conten
   title="Simplified Authentication for Headless CMS: Unlocking Reusability in One Line"
 />
 
-<Banner>
-  Payload provides for highly secure and customizable user Authentication out of the box, which
-  allows for users to identify themselves to Payload.
-</Banner>
+Authentication is a critical part of any application. Payload provides a secure, portable way to manage user accounts out of the box. Payload Authentication is designed to be used in both the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), all well as your own external applications, completely eliminating the need for paid, third-party platforms and services.
 
-Authentication is used within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) itself as well as throughout your app(s) themselves however you determine necessary.
+Here are some common use cases of Authentication in your own applications:
 
-![Authentication admin panel functionality](https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/auth-admin.jpg)
-_Admin Panel screenshot depicting an Admins Collection with Auth enabled_
+- Customer accounts for an e-commerce app
+- User accounts for a SaaS product
+- P2P apps or social sites where users need to log in and manage their profiles
+- Online games where players need to track their progress over time
 
-**Here are some common use cases of Authentication outside of Payload's dashboard itself:**
+When Authentication is enabled on a [Collection](../configuration/collections), Payload injects all necessary functionality to support the entire user flow. This includes all [auth-related operations](./operations) like account creation, logging in and out, and resetting passwords, all [auth-related emails](./email) like email verification and password reset, as well as any necessary UI to manage users from the Admin Panel.
 
-- Customer accounts for an ecommerce app
-- Customer accounts for a SaaS product
-- P2P app or social site where users need to log in and manage their profiles
-- Online game where players need to track their progress over time
-
-By default, Payload provides you with a `User` collection that supports Authentication, which is used to access the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). But, you can add support to one or many Collections of your own. For more information on how to customize, override, or remove the default `User` collection, [click here](/docs/admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection).
-
-## Enabling Auth on a collection
-
-Every Payload Collection can opt-in to supporting Authentication by specifying the `auth` property on the Collection's config to either `true` or to an object containing `auth` options.
-
-**For a full list of all `auth` options, [click here](/docs/authentication/config).**
-
-Simple example collection:
+To enable Authentication on a Collection, use the `auth` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collection#auth):
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Users: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  auth: true, // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+![Authentication Admin Panel functionality](https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/auth-admin.jpg)
+_Admin Panel screenshot depicting an Admins Collection with Auth enabled_
+
+## Config Options
+
+Any [Collection](../configuration/collections) can opt-in to supporting Authentication. Once enabled, each Document that is created within the Collection can be thought of as a "user". This enables a complete authentication workflow on your Collection, such as logging in and out, resetting their password, and more.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  By default, Payload provides an auth-enabled `User` Collection which is used to access the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/overview#the-admin-user-collection).
+</Banner>
+
+To enable Authentication on a Collection, use the `auth` property in the [Collection Config](../configuration/collections):
+
+```ts
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const Admins: CollectionConfig = {
-  slug: 'admins',
+  // ...
   // highlight-start
   auth: {
     tokenExpiration: 7200, // How many seconds to keep the user logged in
@@ -52,53 +61,137 @@ export const Admins: CollectionConfig = {
     // More options are available
   },
   // highlight-end
-  fields: [
-    {
-      name: 'role',
-      type: 'select',
-      required: true,
-      options: ['user', 'admin', 'editor', 'developer'],
-    },
-  ],
 }
 ```
 
-**By enabling Authentication on a config, the following modifications will automatically be made to your Collection:**
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  For default auth behavior, set `auth: true`. This is a good starting point for most applications.
+</Banner>
 
-1. `email` as well as password `salt` & `hash` fields will be added to your Collection's schema
-1. The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) will feature a new set of corresponding UI to allow for changing password and editing email
-1. [A new set of `operations`](/docs/authentication/operations) will be exposed via Payload's REST, Local, and GraphQL APIs
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  Auth-enabled Collections with be automatically injected with the `hash`, `salt`, and `email` fields. [More details](../fields/overview#field-names).
+</Banner>
 
-Once enabled, each document that is created within the Collection can be thought of as a `user` - who can make use of commonly required authentication functions such as logging in / out, resetting their password, and more.
+The following options are available:
 
-## Authentication Strategies
+| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
+|----------------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`cookies`**              | Set cookie options, including `secure`, `sameSite`, and `domain`. For advanced users.                                                                                                                                               |
+| **`depth`**                | How many levels deep a `user` document should be populated when creating the JWT and binding the `user` to the `req`. Defaults to `0` and should only be modified if absolutely necessary, as this will affect performance. |
+| **`disableLocalStrategy`** | Advanced - disable Payload's built-in local auth strategy. Only use this property if you have replaced Payload's auth mechanisms with your own.                                                                                     |
+| **`forgotPassword`**       | Customize the way that the `forgotPassword` operation functions. [More details](./email#forgot-password).                                                                                                             |
+| **`lockTime`**             | Set the time (in milliseconds) that a user should be locked out if they fail authentication more times than `maxLoginAttempts` allows for.                                                                                          |
+| **`loginWithUsername`**    | Ability to allow users to login with username/password. [More](/docs/authentication/overview#login-with-username)                                                                                                                     |
+| **`maxLoginAttempts`**     | Only allow a user to attempt logging in X amount of times. Automatically locks out a user from authenticating if this limit is passed. Set to `0` to disable.                                                                       |
+| **`removeTokenFromResponses`** | Set to true if you want to remove the token from the returned authentication API responses such as login or refresh.                                                                                                                                                            |
+| **`strategies`**           | Advanced - an array of custom authentification strategies to extend this collection's authentication with. [More details](./custom-strategies).                                                                         |
+| **`tokenExpiration`**      | How long (in seconds) to keep the user logged in. JWTs and HTTP-only cookies will both expire at the same time.                                                                                                                     |
+| **`useAPIKey`**            | Payload Authentication provides for API keys to be set on each user within an Authentication-enabled Collection. [More details](./api-keys).                                                                       |
+| **`verify`**               | Set to `true` or pass an object with verification options to require users to verify by email before they are allowed to log into your app. [More details](./email#email-verification).                                  |
 
-Out of the box Payload ships with a few powerful authentication strategies. HTTP-Only Cookies, JWT's and API-Keys, they can work together or individually. You can also have multiple collections that have auth enabled, but only 1 of them can be used to log into the admin panel.
+### Login With Username
+
+You can allow users to login with their username instead of their email address by setting the `loginWithUsername` property to `true`.
+
+Example:
+
+```ts
+{
+  slug: 'customers',
+  auth: {
+    loginWithUsername: true,
+  },
+}
+```
+
+Or, you can pass an object with additional options:
+
+```ts
+{
+  slug: 'customers',
+  auth: {
+    loginWithUsername: {
+      allowEmailLogin: true, // default: false
+      requireEmail: false, // default: false
+    },
+  },
+}
+```
+
+**`allowEmailLogin`**
+
+If set to `true`, users can log in with either their username or email address. If set to `false`, users can only log in with their username.
+
+**`requireEmail`**
+
+If set to `true`, an email address is required when creating a new user. If set to `false`, email is not required upon creation.
+
+## Auto-Login
+
+For testing and demo purposes you may want to skip forcing the user to login in order to access your application. Typically, all users should be required to login, however, you can speed up local development time by enabling auto-login.
+
+To enable auto-login, set the `autoLogin` property in the [Admin Config](../configuration/admin):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  autoLogin:
+    process.env.NEXT_PUBLIC_ENABLE_AUTOLOGIN === 'true'
+      ? {
+          email: 'test@example.com',
+          password: 'test',
+          prefillOnly: true,
+        }
+      : false,
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Warning:</strong>
+  The recommended way to use this feature is behind an [Environment Variable](../configuration/environment-vars). This will ensure it is _disabled_ in production.
+</Banner>
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option            | Description                                                                                                     |
+|-------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`username`**    | The username of the user to login as                                                                            |
+| **`email`**       | The email address of the user to login as                                                                       |
+| **`password`**    | The password of the user to login as. This is only needed if `prefillOnly` is set to true                       |
+| **`prefillOnly`** | If set to true, the login credentials will be prefilled but the user will still need to click the login button. |
+
+## Operations
+
+All auth-related operations are available via Payload's REST, Local, and GraphQL APIs. These operations are automatically added to your Collection when you enable Authentication. [More details](./operations).
+
+## Strategies
+
+Out of the box Payload ships with a three powerful Authentication strategies:
+
+- [HTTP-Only Cookies](./cookies)
+- [JSON Web Tokens (JWT)](./jwt)
+- [API-Keys](./api-keys)
+
+Each of these strategies can work together or independently. You can also create your own custom strategies to fit your specific needs. [More details](./custom-strategies).
 
 ### HTTP-Only Cookies
 
-HTTP-only cookies are a highly secure method of storing identifiable data on a user's device so that Payload can automatically recognize a returning user until their cookie expires. They are totally protected from common XSS attacks and <strong>cannot be read by JavaScript in the browser</strong>, unlike JWT's.
-
-You can learn more about this strategy from the [HTTP-Only Cookies](/docs/authentication/http-only-cookies) docs.
+[HTTP-only cookies](https://developer.mozilla.org/en-US/docs/Web/HTTP/Cookies) are a highly secure method of storing identifiable data on a user's device so that Payload can automatically recognize a returning user until their cookie expires. They are totally protected from common XSS attacks and <strong>cannot be read by JavaScript in the browser</strong>, unlike JWT's. [More details](./cookies).
 
 ### JSON Web Tokens
 
-JWT (JSON Web Tokens) can also be utilized to perform authentication. Tokens are generated on `login`, `refresh` and `me` operations and can be attached to future requests to authenticate users.
-
-You can learn more about this strategy from the [JWT](/docs/authentication/jwt) docs.
+JWT (JSON Web Tokens) can also be utilized to perform authentication. Tokens are generated on `login`, `refresh` and `me` operations and can be attached to future requests to authenticate users. [More details](./jwt).
 
 ### API Keys
 
-API Keys can be enabled on auth collections. These are particularly useful when you want to authenticate against Payload from a third party service.
-
-You can learn more about this strategy from the [API Keys](/docs/authentication/api-keys) docs.
+API Keys can be enabled on auth collections. These are particularly useful when you want to authenticate against Payload from a third party service. [More details](./api-keys).
 
 ### Custom Strategies
 
-There are cases where these may not be enough for your application. Payload is extendable by design so you can wire up your own strategy when you need to.
-
-You can learn more about custom strategies from the [Custom Strategies](/docs/authentication/custom-strategies) docs.
-
-## Logging in / out, resetting password, etc.
-
-[Click here](/docs/authentication/operations) for a list of all automatically-enabled Auth operations, including `login`, `logout`, `refresh`, and others.
+There are cases where these may not be enough for your application. Payload is extendable by design so you can wire up your own strategy when you need to. [More details](./custom-strategies).

docs/authentication/token-data.mdx

@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ export const Users: CollectionConfig = {
 
 ### Using Token Data
 
-This is especially helful when writing hooks and access control that depend on user defined fields.
+This is especially helpful when writing [Hooks](../hooks/overview) and [Access Control](../access-control/overview) that depend on user defined fields.
 
 ```ts
 import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'

docs/cloud/projects.mdx

@@ -59,9 +59,7 @@ You can update settings from your Project’s Settings tab. Changes to your buil
 From the Environment Variables page of the Settings tab, you can add, update and delete variables for use in your project. Like build settings, these changes will trigger a redeployment of your project.
 
 <Banner>
-  Note: For security reasons, any variables you wish to provide to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) must be prefixed
-  with `PAYLOAD_PUBLIC_`.  Learn more
-  [here](../configuration/environment-vars).
+  Note: For security reasons, any variables you wish to provide to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) must be prefixed with `NEXT_PUBLIC_`. [More details](../configuration/environment-vars).
 </Banner>
 
 ## Custom Domains
@@ -98,13 +96,13 @@ From there, you are ready to make updates to your project. When you are ready to
 
 ## Cloud Plugin
 
-Projects generated from a template will come pre-configured with the official Cloud Plugin, but if you are using your own repository you will need to add this into your project. To do so, add the plugin to your Payload config:
+Projects generated from a template will come pre-configured with the official Cloud Plugin, but if you are using your own repository you will need to add this into your project. To do so, add the plugin to your Payload Config:
 
 `yarn add @payloadcms/plugin-cloud`
 
 ```js
 import { payloadCloud } from '@payloadcms/plugin-cloud'
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   plugins: [payloadCloud()],
@@ -113,7 +111,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  **Note:** If your Payload config already has an email with transport, this will take precedence
+  **Note:** If your Payload Config already has an email with transport, this will take precedence
   over Payload Cloud's email service.
 </Banner>
 

docs/configuration/collections.mdx

@@ -6,11 +6,13 @@ desc: Structure your Collections for your needs by defining fields, adding slugs
 keywords: collections, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload Collections are defined through configs of their own. You can define as many Collections as your application needs. Each Collection will automatically scaffold a new collection / table in your database of choice, based on fields that you define.
+A Collection is a group of records, called Documents, that all share a common schema. You can define as many Collections as your application needs. Each Document in a Collection is stored in the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define, and automatically generates a [Local API](../local-api/overview), [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) used to manage your Documents.
 
-## Config Options
+Collections are also used to achieve [Authentication](../authentication/overview) in Payload. By defining a Collection with `auth` options, that Collection receives additional operations to support user authentication.
 
-To define a Collection Config, use the `collection` property in your [Payload Config](./overview).
+Collections are the primary way to structure recurring data in your application, such as users, products, pages, posts, and other types of content that you might want to manage. Each Collection can have its own unique [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Admin Options](#admin-options), and more.
+
+To define a Collection Config, use the `collection` property in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -18,12 +20,19 @@ import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 export default buildConfig({
   // ...
   collections: [ // highlight-line
-    // Your Collection Configs go here
+    // Your Collections go here
   ],
 })
 ```
 
-It's often best practice to write your Collections in separate files and then import them into the main Payload Config.
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  If your Collection is only ever meant to contain a single Document, consider using a [Global](./globals) instead.
+</Banner>
+
+## Config Options
+
+It's often best practice to write your Collections in separate files and then import them into the main [Payload Config](../overview).
 
 Here is what a simple Collection Config might look like:
 
@@ -43,184 +52,56 @@ export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub.
+  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                              |
-|------------------------|--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| **`admin`**            | The configuration options for the Admin Panel. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                                                               |
-| **`access`**           | Provide access control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with Documents in this Collection. [More details](../access-control/overview/#collections).                                                   |
-| **`auth`**             | Specify options if you would like this Collection to feature authentication. For more, consult the [Authentication](../authentication/config) documentation.                                                          |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                          |
-| **`disableDuplicate`** | When true, do not show the "Duplicate" button while editing documents within this Collection and prevent `duplicate` from all APIs.                                                                                      |
-| **`defaultSort`**      | Pass a top-level field to sort by default in the Collection List View. Prefix the name of the field with a minus symbol ("-") to sort in descending order.                                                               |
-| **`dbName`**      | Custom table or Collection name depending on the database adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. |
-| **`endpoints`**        | Add custom routes to the REST API. Set to `false` to disable routes. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                                                    |
-| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Collection. [Click here](../fields/overview) for a full list of field types as well as how to configure them. |
-| **`graphQL`**          | An object with `singularName` and `pluralName` strings used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. Set to `false` to disable GraphQL.                                                            |
-| **`hooks`**            | Entry points to "tie in" to Collection actions at specific points. [More details](../hooks/overview#collection-hooks).                                                                                                         |
-| **`labels`**           | Singular and plural labels for use in identifying this Collection throughout Payload. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                           |
-| **`slug`** \*          | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Collection.                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`timestamps`**       | Set to false to disable documents' automatically generated `createdAt` and `updatedAt` timestamps.                                                                                                                       |
-| **`typescript`**       | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`upload`**           | Specify options if you would like this Collection to support file uploads. For more, consult the [Uploads](../upload/overview) documentation.                                                                         |
-| **`versions`**         | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More details](../versions/overview#collection-config).                                                                                            |
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                    |
+|------------------------|----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`admin`**            | The configuration options for the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/collections).                                                                                                           |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Access Control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with Documents in this Collection. [More details](../access-control/collections).                             |
+| **`auth`**             | Specify options if you would like this Collection to feature authentication. [More details](../authentication/overview).                                                                       |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`disableDuplicate`** | When true, do not show the "Duplicate" button while editing documents within this Collection and prevent `duplicate` from all APIs.                                                            |
+| **`defaultSort`**      | Pass a top-level field to sort by default in the Collection List View. Prefix the name of the field with a minus symbol ("-") to sort in descending order.                                     |
+| **`dbName`**           | Custom table or Collection name depending on the Database Adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                    |
+| **`endpoints`**        | Add custom routes to the REST API. Set to `false` to disable routes. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                    |
+| **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Collection. [More details](../fields/overview).                                        |
+| **`graphQL`**          | An object with `singularName` and `pluralName` strings used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. Set to `false` to disable GraphQL.                                  |
+| **`hooks`**            | Entry point for Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview#collection-hooks).                                                                                                                     |
+| **`labels`**           | Singular and plural labels for use in identifying this Collection throughout Payload. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                 |
+| **`lockDocuments`**    | Enables or disables document locking. By default, document locking is enabled. Set to an object to configure, or set to `false` to disable locking. [More details](../admin/locked-documents). |
+| **`slug`** \*          | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Collection.                                                                                                                |
+| **`timestamps`**       | Set to false to disable documents' automatically generated `createdAt` and `updatedAt` timestamps.                                                                                             |
+| **`typescript`**       | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                            |
+| **`upload`**           | Specify options if you would like this Collection to support file uploads. For more, consult the [Uploads](../upload/overview) documentation.                                                  |
+| **`versions`**         | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More details](../versions/overview#collection-config).                                                            |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Admin Options
+### Fields
 
-You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Collection-by-Collection basis.
-
-To configure Collection Admin Options, use the `admin` property in your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Option                       | Description                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-| ---------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`group`**                      | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                                                                                             |
-| **`hidden`**                     | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Collection from navigation and admin routing.                                                                 |
-| **`hooks`**                      | Admin-specific hooks for this Collection. [More details](#admin-hooks).                                                                                                                                        |
-| **`useAsTitle`**                 | Specify a top-level field to use for a document title throughout the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). If no field is defined, the ID of the document is used as the title.                                                |
-| **`description`**                | Text or React component to display below the Collection label in the List View to give editors more information.                                                                                      |
-| **`defaultColumns`**             | Array of field names that correspond to which columns to show by default in this Collection's List View.                                                                                              |
-| **`hideAPIURL`**                 | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this Collection.                                                                                                                        |
-| **`enableRichTextLink`**         | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Link` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default.         |
-| **`enableRichTextRelationship`** | The [Rich Text](../fields/rich-text) field features a `Relationship` element which allows for users to automatically reference related documents within their rich text. Set to `true` by default. |
-| **`meta`**                       | Metadata overrides to apply to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Included properties are `description` and `openGraph`.                                                                           |
-| **`preview`**                    | Function to generate preview URLs within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).                                                                                                |
-| **`livePreview`**                | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).                                                                              |
-| **`components`**                 | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Collection. [More details](../admin/components#collections).                                                                                       |
-| **`listSearchableFields`**       | Specify which fields should be searched in the List search view. [More details](#list-searchable-fields).                                                                                                      |
-| **`pagination`**             | Set pagination-specific options for this Collection. [More details](#pagination).                                                                                                                              |
-
-#### Preview
-
-It is possible to display a Preview Button in the Admin Panel within the Edit View. This will allow editors to visit the frontend of your app the corresponds to the document they are actively editing. This way they can preview the latest, potentially unpublished changes.
-
-To configure the Preview Button, set the `admin.preview` property to a function in your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    // highlight-start
-    preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
-      if (doc?.slug) {
-        return `/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
-      }
-
-      return null
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The preview function receives two arguments:
-
-| Argument | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| **`doc`** | The document being edited |
-| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
-</Banner>
-
-### Pagination
-
-All Collections receive their own List View which displays a paginated list of documents that can be sorted and filtered. The pagination behavior of the List View can be customized on a per-Collection basis.
-
-To configure pagination options, use the `admin.pagination` property in your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    // highlight-start
-    pagination: {
-      defaultLimit: 10,
-      limits: [10, 20, 50],
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Option         | Description                                                                                         |
-| -------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `defaultLimit` | Integer that specifies the default per-page limit that should be used. Defaults to 10.              |
-| `limits`       | Provide an array of integers to use as per-page options for admins to choose from in the List View. |
+Fields define the schema of the Documents within a Collection. To learn more, go to the [Fields](../fields/overview) documentation.
 
 ### Access Control
 
-You can specify extremely granular access control (what users can do with documents in a Collection) on a Collection by
-Collection basis. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](../access-control/overview) docs.
+[Collection Access Control](../access-control/overview) determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Document within a Collection. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](../access-control/overview) documentation.
 
 ### Hooks
 
-Hooks are a powerful way to extend Collection functionality and execute your own logic, and can be defined on a
-Collection by Collection basis. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](../hooks/overview) documentation.
+[Collection Hooks](../hooks/collections) allow you to tie into the lifecycle of your Documents so you can execute your own logic during specific events. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](../hooks/overview) documentation.
 
-### List Searchable Fields
+### Admin Options
 
-In the List View, there is a "search" box that allows you to quickly find a document through a simple text search. By default, it searches on the ID field. If defined, the `admin.useAsTitle` field is used. Or, you can explicitly define which fields to search based on the needs of your application.
-
-To define which fields should be searched, use the `admin.listSearchableFields` property in your Collection Config:
-
-```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const Posts: CollectionConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    // highlight-start
-    listSearchableFields: ['title', 'slug'],
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  If you are adding `listSearchableFields`, make sure you index each of these fields so your admin queries can remain performant.
-</Banner>
+You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Collection-by-Collection basis. To learn more, go to the [Collection Admin Options](../admin/collections) documentation.
 
 ## TypeScript
 
-You can import Collection types as follows:
+You can import types from Payload to help make writing your Collection configs easier and type-safe. There are two main types that represent the Collection Config, `CollectionConfig` and `SanitizeCollectionConfig`.
+
+The `CollectionConfig` type represents a raw Collection Config in its full form, where only the bare minimum properties are marked as required. The `SanitizedCollectionConfig` type represents a Collection Config after it has been fully sanitized. Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-// This is the type used for incoming Collection configs.
-// Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required.
-```
-
-```ts
-import { SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
-
-// This is the type used after an incoming Collection config is fully sanitized.
-// Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
+import type { CollectionConfig, SanitizedCollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 ```

docs/configuration/environment-vars.mdx

@@ -7,9 +7,11 @@ desc: Learn how to use Environment Variables in your Payload project
 
 Environment Variables are a way to store sensitive information that your application needs to function. This could be anything from API keys to [Database](../database/overview) credentials. Payload allows you to easily use Environment Variables within your config and throughout your application.
 
-If you are using Next.js, no additional setup is required other than creating your `.env` file. Otherwise, you can use the `dotenv` package to load your Environment Variables into `process.env`. [More details](#outside-of-nextjs).
+## Next.js Applications
 
-Environment Variables are typically stored in an `.env` file at the root of your project:
+If you are using Next.js, no additional setup is required other than creating your `.env` file.
+
+To use Environment Variables, add a `.env` file to the root of your project:
 
 ```plaintext
 project-name/
@@ -25,7 +27,7 @@ SERVER_URL=localhost:3000
 DATABASE_URI=mongodb://localhost:27017/my-database
 ```
 
-To use Environment Variables in your Payload config, you can access them directly from `process.env`:
+To use Environment Variables in your Payload Config, you can access them directly from `process.env`:
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'

docs/configuration/globals.mdx

@@ -6,9 +6,9 @@ desc: Set up your Global config for your needs by defining fields, adding slugs
 keywords: globals, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload Globals are in many ways similar to [Collections](../configuration/collections). The big difference is that Collections will potentially contain _many_ documents, while a Global is a "one-off". Globals are perfect for things like header nav, site-wide banner alerts, app-wide localized strings, and other "global" data that your site or app might rely on.
+Globals are in many ways similar to [Collections](../configuration/collections), except they correspond to only a single Document. You can define as many Globals as your application needs. Each Global Document is stored in the [Database](../database/overview) based on the [Fields](../fields/overview) that you define, and automatically generates a [Local API](../local-api/overview), [REST API](../rest-api/overview), and [GraphQL API](../graphql/overview) used to manage your Documents.
 
-## Config Options
+Globals are the primary way to structure singletons in Payload, such as a header navigation, site-wide banner alerts, or app-wide localized strings. Each Global can have its own unique [Access Control](../access-control/overview), [Hooks](../hooks/overview), [Admin Options](#admin-options), and more.
 
 To define a Global Config, use the `globals` property in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
@@ -18,12 +18,19 @@ import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 export default buildConfig({
   // ...
   globals: [ // highlight-line
-    // Your Global Configs go here
+    // Your Globals go here
   ],
 })
 ```
 
-It's often best practice to write your Globals in separate files and then import them into the main Payload Config.
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  If you have more than one Global that share the same structure, consider using a [Collection](../configuration/collections) instead.
+</Banner>
+
+## Config Options
+
+It's often best practice to write your Globals in separate files and then import them into the main [Payload Config](./overview).
 
 Here is what a simple Global Config might look like:
 
@@ -53,118 +60,52 @@ export const Nav: GlobalConfig = {
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub.
+  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Option             | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
-| ------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`access`**       | Provide access control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with this Global. [More details](../access-control/overview/#globals).                                                                    |
-| **`admin`**        | The configuration options for the Admin Panel. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                           |
-| **`custom`**       | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                            |
-| **`dbName`**       | Custom table or collection name for this Global depending on the database adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. |
-| **`description`**  | Text or React component to display below the Global header to give editors more information.                                                                                                                         |
-| **`endpoints`**    | Add custom routes to the REST API. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                                                                                  |
-| **`fields`** \*    | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Global. [Click here](../fields/overview) for a full list of field types as well as how to configure them. |
-| **`graphQL.name`** | Text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                          |
-| **`hooks`**        | Entry points to "tie in" to collection actions at specific points. [More details](../hooks/overview#global-hooks).  |
-| **`label`**        | Text for the name in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`slug`** \*      | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Global.                                                                                                                                          |
-| **`typescript`**   | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.    |
-| **`versions`**     | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More details](../versions/overview#globals-config).                                                                                           |
+| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                    |
+| ------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`access`**        | Provide Access Control functions to define exactly who should be able to do what with this Global. [More details](../access-control/globals).                                                  |
+| **`admin`**         | The configuration options for the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/globals).                                                                                                               |
+| **`custom`**        | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`dbName`**        | Custom table or collection name for this Global depending on the Database Adapter. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                    |
+| **`description`**   | Text or React component to display below the Global header to give editors more information.                                                                                                   |
+| **`endpoints`**     | Add custom routes to the REST API. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                                                      |
+| **`fields`** \*     | Array of field types that will determine the structure and functionality of the data stored within this Global. [More details](../fields/overview).                                            |
+| **`graphQL.name`**  | Text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                                                                       |
+| **`hooks`**         | Entry point for Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview#global-hooks).                                                                                                                         |
+| **`label`**         | Text for the name in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                        |
+| **`lockDocuments`** | Enables or disables document locking. By default, document locking is enabled. Set to an object to configure, or set to `false` to disable locking. [More details](../admin/locked-documents). |
+| **`slug`** \*       | Unique, URL-friendly string that will act as an identifier for this Global.                                                                                                                    |
+| **`typescript`**    | An object with property `interface` as the text used in schema generation. Auto-generated from slug if not defined.                                                                            |
+| **`versions`**      | Set to true to enable default options, or configure with object properties. [More details](../versions/overview#globals-config).                                                               |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
+### Fields
+
+Fields define the schema of the Global. To learn more, go to the [Fields](../fields/overview) documentation.
 
 ### Access Control
 
-As with Collections, you can specify extremely granular access control (what users can do with this Global) on a Global-by-Global basis. However, Globals only have `update` and `read` access control due to their nature of only having one document. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](../access-control/overview) docs.
+[Global Access Control](../access-control/globals) determines what a user can and cannot do with any given Global Document. To learn more, go to the [Access Control](../access-control/overview) documentation.
 
 ### Hooks
 
-Globals also fully support a smaller subset of Hooks. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](../hooks/overview) documentation.
+[Global Hooks](../hooks/globals) allow you to tie into the lifecycle of your Documents so you can execute your own logic during specific events. To learn more, go to the [Hooks](../hooks/overview) documentation.
 
 ### Admin Options
 
-You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Global-by-Global basis.
-
-To configure Collection Admin Options, use the `admin` property in your Global Config:
-
-```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-
-const MyGlobal: GlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: { // highlight-line
-    // ...
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The following options are available:
-
-| Option        | Description                                                                                                                       |
-| ------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`group`**       | Text used as a label for grouping Collection and Global links together in the navigation.                                         |
-| **`hidden`**      | Set to true or a function, called with the current user, returning true to exclude this Global from navigation and admin routing. |
-| **`components`**  | Swap in your own React components to be used within this Global. [More details](../admin/components#globals).                           |
-| **`preview`**     | Function to generate a preview URL within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) for this Global that can point to your app. [More details](#preview).           |
-| **`livePreview`** | Enable real-time editing for instant visual feedback of your front-end application. [More details](../live-preview/overview).          |
-| **`hideAPIURL`**  | Hides the "API URL" meta field while editing documents within this collection.                                                    |
-| **`meta`**        | Metadata overrides to apply to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). Included properties are `description` and `openGraph`.       |
-
-#### Preview
-
-It is possible to display a Preview Button in the Admin Panel within the Edit View. This will allow editors to visit the frontend of your app the corresponds to the document they are actively editing. This way they can preview the latest, potentially unpublished changes.
-
-To configure the Preview Button, set the `admin.preview` property to a function in your Global Config:
-
-```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-
-export const MainMenu: GlobalConfig = {
-  // ...
-  admin: {
-    // highlight-start
-    preview: (doc, { locale }) => {
-      if (doc?.slug) {
-        return `/${doc.slug}?locale=${locale}`
-      }
-
-      return null
-    },
-    // highlight-end
-  },
-}
-```
-
-The preview function receives two arguments:
-
-| Argument | Description |
-| --- | --- |
-| **`doc`** | The document being edited |
-| **`ctx`** | An object containing `locale` and `token` properties. The `token` is the currently logged-in user's JWT. |
-
-<Banner type="success">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
-  For fully working example of this, check of the official [Draft Preview Example](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview) in the [Examples Directory](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples).
-</Banner>
+You can customize the way that the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) behaves on a Global-by-Global basis. To learn more, go to the [Global Admin Options](../admin/globals) documentation.
 
 ## TypeScript
 
-You can import Global types as follows:
+You can import types from Payload to help make writing your Global configs easier and type-safe. There are two main types that represent the Global Config, `GlobalConfig` and `SanitizeGlobalConfig`.
+
+The `GlobalConfig` type represents a raw Global Config in its full form, where only the bare minimum properties are marked as required. The `SanitizedGlobalConfig` type represents a Global Config after it has been fully sanitized. Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
 
 ```ts
-import { GlobalConfig } from 'payload'
-
-// This is the type used for incoming Global configs.
-// Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required.
-```
-
-```ts
-import { SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload/types'
-
-// This is the type used after an incoming Global config is fully sanitized.
-// Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
+import type { GlobalConfig, SanitizedGlobalConfig } from 'payload'
 ```

docs/configuration/i18n.mdx

@@ -6,9 +6,22 @@ desc: Manage and customize internationalization support in your CMS editor exper
 keywords: internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) is translated in over [30 languages and counting](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/translations). With i18n, editors can navigate the interface and read API error messages in their preferred language. Users can easily select a language from the Account View and have their preference saved for future visits.
+The [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) is translated in over [30 languages and counting](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/beta/packages/translations). With I18n, editors can navigate the interface and read API error messages in their preferred language. This is similar to [Localization](./localization), but instead of managing translations for the data itself, you are managing translations for your application's interface.
 
-By default, Payload comes with preinstalled with English, but you can easily load other languages into your own application. Languages are automatically detected based on the user's browser. If no language was detected, or if the user's language is not yet supported by your application, English will be chosen.
+By default, Payload comes with preinstalled with English, but you can easily load other languages into your own application. Languages are automatically detected based on the request. If no language was detected, or if the user's language is not yet supported by your application, English will be chosen.
+
+To configure I18n, use the `i18n` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  i18n: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+})
+```
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Note:</strong>
@@ -19,19 +32,44 @@ By default, Payload comes with preinstalled with English, but you can easily loa
 
 You can easily customize and override any of the i18n settings that Payload provides by default. Payload will use your custom options and merge them in with its own.
 
-To add a new language, use the `i18n` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
-
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
-import { en } from 'payload/i18n/en'
-import { de } from 'payload/i18n/de'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   // ...
   // highlight-start
   i18n: {
-    // Payload will support either English or German,
-    // able to be specified in preferences on a user-by-user basis
+    fallbackLanguage: 'en', // default
+    debug: false, // default
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| --------------------- | --------------------------------|
+| **`fallbackLanguage`**     | The language to fall back to if the user's preferred language is not supported. Default is `'en'`.                                                                                                                           |
+| **`debug`**           | Whether to log debug information to the console. Default is `false`.                                                                                                                                                         |
+| **`translations`**    | An object containing the translations. The keys are the language codes and the values are the translations.                                                                                                                |
+| **`supportedLanguages`** | An object containing the supported languages. The keys are the language codes and the values are the translations.                                                                                                         |
+
+## Adding Languages
+
+You can easily add new languages to your Payload app by providing the translations for the new language. Payload maintains a number of built-in translations that can be imported from `@payloadcms/translations`, but you can also provide your own [Custom Translations](#custom-translations) to support any language.
+
+To add a new language, use the `i18n.supportedLanguages` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { en } from '@payloadcms/translations/languages/en'
+import { de } from '@payloadcms/translations/languages/de'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  i18n: {
     supportedLanguages: { en, de },
   },
   // highlight-end
@@ -43,27 +81,18 @@ export default buildConfig({
  It's best to only support the languages that you need so that the bundled JavaScript is kept to a minimum for your project.
 </Banner>
 
-The following options are available:
+### Custom Translations
 
-| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| --------------------- | --------------------------------|
-| **`fallbackLanguage`**     | The language to fall back to if the user's preferred language is not supported. Default is `'en'`.                                                                                                                           |
-| **`debug`**           | Whether to log debug information to the console. Default is `false`.                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`translations`**    | An object containing the translations. The keys are the language codes and the values are the translations.                                                                                                                |
-| **`supportedLanguages`** | An object containing the supported languages. The keys are the language codes and the values are the translations.                                                                                                         |
+You can customize Payload's built-in translations either by extending existing languages or by adding new languages entirely. This can be done by injecting new translation strings into existing languages, or by providing an entirely new language keys altogether.
 
-## Custom Translations
-
-Here is an example of how you can add custom translations to your project:
+To add Custom Translations, use the `i18n.translations` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   //...
   i18n: {
-    fallbackLanguage: 'en', // default
-    debug: false, // default
     // highlight-start
     translations: {
       en: {
@@ -83,9 +112,11 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
-While Payload's built-in features come translated, you may want to also translate parts of your project's configuration too. This is possible in places like Collections and Globals labels and groups, field labels, descriptions and input placeholder text. The admin UI will display all the correct translations you provide based on the user's language.
+### Project Translations
 
-Here is an example of a simple collection supporting both English and Spanish editors:
+While Payload's built-in features come fully translated, you may also want to translate parts of your own project. This is possible in places like [Collections](./collections) and [Globals](./globals), such as on their labels and groups, field labels, descriptions or input placeholder text.
+
+To do this, provide the translations wherever applicable, keyed to the language code:
 
 ```ts
 import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -94,39 +125,45 @@ export const Articles: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'articles',
   labels: {
     singular: {
+      // highlight-start
       en: 'Article',
       es: 'Artículo',
+      // highlight-end
     },
     plural: {
+      // highlight-start
       en: 'Articles',
       es: 'Artículos',
+      // highlight-end
     },
   },
   admin: {
-    group: { en: 'Content', es: 'Contenido' },
+    group: {
+      // highlight-start
+      en: 'Content',
+      es: 'Contenido',
+      // highlight-end
+    },
   },
   fields: [
     {
       name: 'title',
       type: 'text',
       label: {
+        // highlight-start
         en: 'Title',
         es: 'Título',
+        // highlight-end
       },
       admin: {
-        placeholder: { en: 'Enter title', es: 'Introduce el título' },
+        placeholder: {
+          // highlight-start
+          en: 'Enter title',
+          es: 'Introduce el título'
+          // highlight-end
+        },
       },
     },
-    {
-      name: 'type',
-      type: 'radio',
-      options: [
-        {
-          value: 'news',
-          label: { en: 'News', es: 'Noticias' },
-        }, // etc...
-      ],
-    },
   ],
 }
 ```
@@ -135,7 +172,7 @@ export const Articles: CollectionConfig = {
 
 Payload's backend sets the language on incoming requests before they are handled. This allows backend validation to return error messages in the user's own language or system generated emails to be sent using the correct translation. You can make HTTP requests with the `accept-language` header and Payload will use that language.
 
-Anywhere in your Payload app that you have access to the `req` object, you can access payload's extensive internationalization features assigned to `req.i18n`. To access text translations you can use `req.t('namespace:key')`.
+Anywhere in your Payload app that you have access to the `req` object, you can access Payload's extensive internationalization features assigned to `req.i18n`. To access text translations you can use `req.t('namespace:key')`.
 
 ## TypeScript
 
@@ -169,7 +206,7 @@ export const MyComponent: React.FC = () => {
 
 ```
 
-Additionally, payload exposes the `t` function in various places, for example in labels. Here is how you would type those:
+Additionally, Payload exposes the `t` function in various places, for example in labels. Here is how you would type those:
 
 ```ts
 import type {
@@ -177,7 +214,7 @@ import type {
   NestedKeysStripped,
   TFunction,
 } from '@payloadcms/translations'
-import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+import type { Field } from 'payload'
 
 const customTranslations = {
   en: {

docs/configuration/localization.mdx

@@ -2,36 +2,45 @@
 title: Localization
 label: Localization
 order: 50
-desc: Add and maintain as many locales as you need by adding Localization to your Payload config, set options for default locale, fallbacks, fields and more.
+desc: Add and maintain as many locales as you need by adding Localization to your Payload Config, set options for default locale, fallbacks, fields and more.
 keywords: localization, internationalization, i18n, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload features deep field-based localization support. Maintaining as many locales as you need is easy. All
-localization support is opt-in by default. To do so, follow the two steps below.
+Localization is one of the most important features of a modern CMS. It allows you to manage content in multiple languages, then serve it to your users based on their requested language. This is similar to [I18n](./i18n), but instead of managing translations for your application's interface, you are managing translations for the data itself.
 
-## Enabling in the Payload config
+With Localization, you can begin to serve personalized content to your users based on their specific language preferences, such as a multilingual website or multi-site application. There are no limits to the number of locales you can add to your Payload project.
 
-Add the `localization` property to your Payload config to enable localization project-wide. You'll need to provide a
-list of all locales that you'd like to support as well as set a few other options.
-
-**Example Payload config set up for localization:**
+To configure Localization, use the `localization` key in your [Payload Config](./overview):
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export default buildConfig({
-  collections: [
-    // collections go here
-  ],
-  localization: {
-    locales: ['en', 'es', 'de'],
-    defaultLocale: 'en',
-    fallback: true,
+  // ...
+  localization: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
   },
 })
 ```
 
-**Example Payload config set up for localization with full locales objects:**
+## Config Options
+
+Add the `localization` property to your Payload Config to enable Localization project-wide. You'll need to provide a list of all locales that you'd like to support as well as set a few other options.
+
+To configure locales, use the `localization.locales` property in your [Payload Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  localization: {
+    locales: ['en', 'es', 'de'] // highlight-line
+  },
+})
+```
+
+You can also define locales using [full configuration objects](#locale-object):
 
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
@@ -60,50 +69,26 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
-**Example Payload config set up for localization with full locales objects (
-including [internationalization](/docs/configuration/i18n) support):**
+<Banner type="success">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  Localization works very well alongside [I18n](/docs/configuration/i18n).
+</Banner>
 
-```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+The following options are available:
 
-export default buildConfig({
-  collections: [
-    // collections go here
-  ],
-  localization: {
-    locales: [
-      {
-        label: {
-          en: 'English', // English label
-          nb: 'Engelsk', // Norwegian label
-        },
-        code: 'en',
-      },
-      {
-        label: {
-          en: 'Norwegian', // English label
-          nb: 'Norsk', // Norwegian label
-        },
-        code: 'nb',
-      },
-    ],
-    defaultLocale: 'en',
-    fallback: true,
-  },
-})
-```
+| Option         | Description                                                                                                                    |
+| -------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
+| **`locales`**  | Array of all the languages that you would like to support. [More details](#locales)                                            |
+| **`defaultLocale`** | Required string that matches one of the locale codes from the array provided. By default, if no locale is specified, documents will be returned in this locale. |
+| **`fallback`** | Boolean enabling "fallback" locale functionality. If a document is requested in a locale, but a field does not have a localized value corresponding to the requested locale, then if this property is enabled, the document will automatically fall back to the fallback locale value. If this property is not enabled, the value will not be populated. |
 
-**Here is a brief explanation of each of the options available within the `localization` property:**
+### Locales
 
-**`locales`**
+The locales array is a list of all the languages that you would like to support. This can be strings for each language code, or [full configuration objects](#locale-object) for more advanced options.
 
-Array-based list of all the languages that you would like to support. This can be an array containing strings for each
-language code you want your project to store and serve or objects with a `label`, a locale `code`, `rtl` (
-right-to-left), and `fallbackLocale` property. The locale codes do not need to be in any specific format. It's up to you
-to define how to represent your locales. Common patterns are to use two-letter ISO 639 language codes or four-letter
-language and country codes (ISO 3166‑1) such as `en-US`, `en-UK`, `es-MX`, etc.
+The locale codes do not need to be in any specific format. It's up to you to define how to represent your locales. Common patterns are to use two-letter ISO 639 language codes or four-letter language and country codes (ISO 3166‑1) such as `en-US`, `en-UK`, `es-MX`, etc.
 
-## Locale Object Properties
+#### Locale Object
 
 | Option               | Description                                                                                                                    |
 | -------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
@@ -114,23 +99,11 @@ language and country codes (ISO 3166‑1) such as `en-US`, `en-UK`, `es-MX`, etc
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-**`defaultLocale`**
+## Field Localization
 
-Required string that matches one of the locale codes from the array provided. By default, if no locale is specified,
-documents will be returned in this locale.
+Payload Localization works on a **field** level—not a document level. In addition to configuring the base Payload Config to support Localization, you need to specify each field that you would like to localize.
 
-**`fallback`**
-
-Boolean enabling "fallback" locale functionality. If a document is requested in a locale, but a field does not have a
-localized value corresponding to the requested locale, then if this property is enabled, the document will automatically
-fall back to the fallback locale value. If this property is not enabled, the value will not be populated.
-
-## Field by field localization
-
-Payload localization works on a **field** level—not a document level. In addition to configuring the base Payload config
-to support localization, you need to specify each field that you would like to localize.
-
-**Here is an example of how to enable localization for a field:**
+**Here is an example of how to enable Localization for a field:**
 
 ```js
 {
@@ -142,31 +115,27 @@ to support localization, you need to specify each field that you would like to l
 }
 ```
 
-With the above configuration, the `title` field will now be saved in the database as an object of all locales instead of
-a single string.
+With the above configuration, the `title` field will now be saved in the database as an object of all locales instead of a single string.
 
-All field types with a `name` property support the `localized` property—even the more complex field types like `array`s
-and `block`s.
+All field types with a `name` property support the `localized` property—even the more complex field types like `array`s and `block`s.
 
-<Banner>
+<Banner type="info">
   <strong>Note:</strong>
-  <br />
-  Enabling localization for field types that support nested fields will automatically create
+  Enabling Localization for field types that support nested fields will automatically create
   localized "sets" of all fields contained within the field. For example, if you have a page layout
   using a blocks field type, you have the choice of either localizing the full layout, by enabling
-  localization on the top-level blocks field, or only certain fields within the layout.
+  Localization on the top-level blocks field, or only certain fields within the layout.
 </Banner>
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
   When converting an existing field to or from `localized: true` the data structure in the document
   will change for this field and so existing data for this field will be lost. Before changing the
-  localization setting on fields with existing data, you may need to consider a field migration
+  Localization setting on fields with existing data, you may need to consider a field migration
   strategy.
 </Banner>
 
-## Retrieving localized docs
+## Retrieving Localized Docs
 
 When retrieving documents, you can specify which locale you'd like to receive as well as which fallback locale should be
 used.
@@ -182,7 +151,7 @@ Specify your desired locale by providing the `locale` query parameter directly i
 **`?fallback-locale=`**
 
 Specify fallback locale to be used by providing the `fallback-locale` query parameter. This can be provided as either a
-valid locale as provided to your base Payload config, or `'null'`, `'false'`, or `'none'` to disable falling back.
+valid locale as provided to your base Payload Config, or `'null'`, `'false'`, or `'none'` to disable falling back.
 
 **Example:**
 
@@ -234,10 +203,9 @@ const posts = await payload.find({
 })
 ```
 
-<Banner type="alert">
+<Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  The REST and Local APIs can return all localization data in one request by passing 'all' or '*' as
+  The REST and Local APIs can return all Localization data in one request by passing 'all' or '*' as
   the <strong>locale</strong> parameter. The response will be structured so that field values come
   back as the full objects keyed for each locale instead of the single, translated value.
 </Banner>

docs/configuration/overview.mdx

@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ desc: The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does, from adding
 keywords: overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Payload is a _config-based_, code-first CMS and application framework. The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does, allowing for the deep configuration of your application through a simple API.
+Payload is a _config-based_, code-first CMS and application framework. The Payload Config is central to everything that Payload does, allowing for deep configuration of your application through a simple and intuitive API. The Payload Config is a fully-typed JavaScript object that can be infinitely extended upon.
 
 Everything from your [Database](../database/overview) choice, to the appearance of the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), is fully controlled through the Payload Config. From here you can define [Fields](../fields/overview), add [Localization](./localization), enable [Authentication](../authentication/overview), configure [Access Control](../access-control/overview), and so much more.
 
@@ -36,7 +36,6 @@ Here is one of the simplest possible Payload configs:
 ```ts
 import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
-// import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
 
 export default buildConfig({
   secret: process.env.PAYLOAD_SECRET,
@@ -58,67 +57,133 @@ export default buildConfig({
 ```
 
 <Banner type="success">
-  <strong>More:</strong>
-  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub.
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
+  For a more complex example, see the [Public Demo](https://github.com/payloadcms/public-demo) source code on GitHub, or the [Templates](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/templates) and [Examples](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples) directories in the Payload repository.
 </Banner>
 
 The following options are available:
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                        |
-| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`admin`**                | The configuration options for the Admin Panel, including Custom Components, Live Preview, etc. [More details](../admin/overview#admin-options). |
-| **`bin`**                  | Register custom bin scripts with the `payload` bin function. |
-| **`editor`**               | The Rich Text Editor which will be used by `richText` fields. [More details](../rich-text/overview). |
-| **`db`** \*                | The Database Adapter which will be used by Payload. [More details](../database/overview). |
-| **`serverURL`**            | A string used to define the absolute URL of your app including the protocol, for example `https://example.com`. No paths allowed, only protocol, domain and (optionally) port |
-| **`collections`**          | An array of Collections for Payload to manage. [More details](./collections). |
-| **`globals`**              | An array of Globals for Payload to manage. [More details](./globals). |
-| **`cors`**                 | Either a whitelist array of URLS to allow CORS requests from, or a wildcard string (`'*'`) to accept incoming requests from any domain. |
-| **`localization`**         | Opt-in and control how Payload handles the translation of your content into multiple locales. [More details](./localization). |
-| **`graphQL`**              | Manage GraphQL-specific functionality, including custom queries and mutations, query complexity limits, etc. [More details](../graphql/overview#graphql-options). |
-| **`cookiePrefix`**         | A string that will be prefixed to all cookies that Payload sets. |
-| **`csrf`**                 | A whitelist array of URLs to allow Payload cookies to be accepted from as a form of CSRF protection. [More details](../authentication/overview#csrf-protection). |
-| **`defaultDepth`**         | If a user does not specify `depth` while requesting a resource, this depth will be used. [More details](../getting-started/concepts#depth). |
-| **`defaultMaxTextLength`** | The maximum allowed string length to be permitted application-wide. Helps to prevent malicious public document creation. |
-| **`maxDepth`**             | The maximum allowed depth to be permitted application-wide. This setting helps prevent against malicious queries. Defaults to `10`. |
-| **`indexSortableFields`**  | Automatically index all sortable top-level fields in the database to improve sort performance and add database compatibility for Azure Cosmos and similar. |
-| **`upload`**               | Base Payload upload configuration. [More details](../upload/overview#payload-wide-upload-options). |
-| **`routes`**               | Control the routing structure that Payload binds itself to. Specify `admin`, `api`, `graphQL`, and `graphQLPlayground`. [More details](../admin/overview#root-level-routes). |
-| **`email`**                | Configure the Email Adapter for Payload to use. [More details](../email/overview). |
-| **`debug`**                | Enable to expose more detailed error information. |
-| **`telemetry`**            | Disable Payload telemetry by passing `false`. [More details](#telemetry). |
-| **`rateLimit`**            | Control IP-based rate limiting for all Payload resources. Used to prevent DDoS attacks, etc. [More details](../production/preventing-abuse#rate-limiting-requests). |
-| **`hooks`**                | Tap into Payload-wide hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview). |
-| **`plugins`**              | An array of Payload plugins. [More details](../plugins/overview). |
-| **`endpoints`**            | An array of custom API endpoints added to the Payload router. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints). |
-| **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins). |
-| **`i18n`**                 | Internationalization configuration. Pass all i18n languages you'd like the admin UI to support. Defaults to English-only. [More details](./i18n). |
-| **`secret`** \*            | A secure, unguessable string that Payload will use for any encryption workflows - for example, password salt / hashing. |
-| **`sharp`**                | If you would like Payload to offer cropping, focal point selection, and automatic media resizing, install and pass the Sharp module to the config here. |
-| **`typescript`**           | Configure TypeScript settings here. [More details](#typescript). |
+| Option                     | Description                                                                                                                                                                                    |
+|----------------------------|------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`admin`**                | The configuration options for the Admin Panel, including Custom Components, Live Preview, etc. [More details](../admin/overview#admin-options).                                                |
+| **`bin`**                  | Register custom bin scripts for Payload to execute.                                                                                                                                            |
+| **`editor`**               | The Rich Text Editor which will be used by `richText` fields. [More details](../rich-text/overview).                                                                                           |
+| **`db`** \*                | The Database Adapter which will be used by Payload. [More details](../database/overview).                                                                                                      |
+| **`serverURL`**            | A string used to define the absolute URL of your app. This includes the protocol, for example `https://example.com`. No paths allowed, only protocol, domain and (optionally) port.            |
+| **`collections`**          | An array of Collections for Payload to manage. [More details](./collections).                                                                                                                  |
+| **`compatibility`**        | Compatibility flags for earlier versions of Payload. [More details](#compatibility-flags).                                                                                                     |
+| **`globals`**              | An array of Globals for Payload to manage. [More details](./globals).                                                                                                                          |
+| **`cors`**                 | Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) is a mechanism that accept incoming requests from given domains. You can also customize the `Access-Control-Allow-Headers` header. [More details](#cors). |
+| **`localization`**         | Opt-in to translate your content into multiple locales. [More details](./localization).                                                                                                        |
+| **`logger`**               | Logger options, logger options with a destination stream, or an instantiated logger instance. [More details](https://getpino.io/#/docs/api?id=options).                                        |
+| **`graphQL`**              | Manage GraphQL-specific functionality, including custom queries and mutations, query complexity limits, etc. [More details](../graphql/overview#graphql-options).                              |
+| **`cookiePrefix`**         | A string that will be prefixed to all cookies that Payload sets.                                                                                                                               |
+| **`csrf`**                 | A whitelist array of URLs to allow Payload to accept cookies from. [More details](../authentication/overview#csrf-protection).                                                                 |
+| **`defaultDepth`**         | If a user does not specify `depth` while requesting a resource, this depth will be used. [More details](../queries/depth).                                                                     |
+| **`defaultMaxTextLength`** | The maximum allowed string length to be permitted application-wide. Helps to prevent malicious public document creation.                                                                       |
+| **`maxDepth`**             | The maximum allowed depth to be permitted application-wide. This setting helps prevent against malicious queries. Defaults to `10`. [More details](../queries/depth).                          |
+| **`indexSortableFields`**  | Automatically index all sortable top-level fields in the database to improve sort performance and add database compatibility for Azure Cosmos and similar.                                     |
+| **`upload`**               | Base Payload upload configuration. [More details](../upload/overview#payload-wide-upload-options).                                                                                             |
+| **`routes`**               | Control the routing structure that Payload binds itself to. [More details](../admin/overview#root-level-routes).                                                                               |
+| **`email`**                | Configure the Email Adapter for Payload to use. [More details](../email/overview).                                                                                                             |
+| **`debug`**                | Enable to expose more detailed error information.                                                                                                                                              |
+| **`telemetry`**            | Disable Payload telemetry by passing `false`. [More details](#telemetry).                                                                                                                      |
+| **`rateLimit`**            | Control IP-based rate limiting for all Payload resources. Used to prevent DDoS attacks, etc. [More details](../production/preventing-abuse#rate-limiting-requests).                            |
+| **`hooks`**                | An array of Root Hooks. [More details](../hooks/overview).                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`plugins`**              | An array of Plugins. [More details](../plugins/overview).                                                                                                                                      |
+| **`endpoints`**            | An array of Custom Endpoints added to the Payload router. [More details](../rest-api/overview#custom-endpoints).                                                                               |
+| **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins).                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`i18n`**                 | Internationalization configuration. Pass all i18n languages you'd like the admin UI to support. Defaults to English-only. [More details](./i18n).                                              |
+| **`secret`** \*            | A secure, unguessable string that Payload will use for any encryption workflows - for example, password salt / hashing.                                                                        |
+| **`sharp`**                | If you would like Payload to offer cropping, focal point selection, and automatic media resizing, install and pass the Sharp module to the config here.                                        |
+| **`typescript`**           | Configure TypeScript settings here. [More details](#typescript).                                                                                                                               |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  <strong>Note:</strong>
   Some properties are removed from the client-side bundle. [More details](../admin/components#accessing-the-payload-config).
 </Banner>
 
+
+### Typescript Config
+
+Payload exposes a variety of TypeScript settings that you can leverage. These settings are used to auto-generate TypeScript interfaces for your [Collections](../configuration/collections) and [Globals](../configuration/globals), and to ensure that Payload uses your [Generated Types](../typescript/overview) for all [Local API](../local-api/overview) methods.
+
+To customize the TypeScript settings, use the `typescript` property in your Payload Config:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  typescript: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  }
+})
+```
+
+The following options are available:
+
+| Option          | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| --------------- | --------------------- |
+| **`autoGenerate`** | By default, Payload will auto-generate TypeScript interfaces for all collections and globals that your config defines. Opt out by setting `typescript.autoGenerate: false`. [More details](../typescript/overview). |
+| **`declare`**     | By default, Payload adds a `declare` block to your generated types, which makes sure that Payload uses your generated types for all Local API methods. Opt out by setting `typescript.declare: false`. |
+| **`outputFile`**  | Control the output path and filename of Payload's auto-generated types by defining the `typescript.outputFile` property to a full, absolute path. |
+
 ## Config Location
 
-For Payload command-line scripts, we need to be able to locate your Payload Config. We'll check a variety of locations for the presence of `payload.config.ts` by default, including the root current working directory, your `tsconfig`'s `rootDir`, and your `tsconfig`'s `outDir`.
+For Payload command-line scripts, we need to be able to locate your Payload Config. We'll check a variety of locations for the presence of `payload.config.ts` by default, including:
 
-In development mode, if the configuration file is not found at the root, Payload will attempt to read your `tsconfig.json`, and search in the directory specified in `compilerOptions.rootDir` (typically "src").
+1. The root current working directory
+1. The `compilerOptions` in your `tsconfig`*
+1. The `dist` directory*
 
-In production mode, Payload will first attempt to find the config file in the output directory specified in `compilerOptions.outDir` of your `tsconfig.json`, then fallback to the source directory (`compilerOptions.rootDir`), and finally will check the 'dist' directory.
+_\* Config location detection is different between development and production environments. See below for more details._
 
-Please ensure your `tsconfig.json` is properly configured if you want Payload to accurately auto-detect your configuration file location. If `tsconfig.json` does not exist or doesn't specify `rootDir` or `outDir`, Payload will default to the current working directory.
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  Ensure your `tsconfig.json` is properly configured for Payload to auto-detect your config location. If if does not exist, or does not specify the proper `compilerOptions`, Payload will default to the current working directory.
+</Banner>
+
+**Development Mode**
+
+In development mode, if the configuration file is not found at the root, Payload will attempt to read your `tsconfig.json`, and attempt to find the config file specified in the `rootDir`:
+
+```json
+{
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  "compilerOptions": {
+    "rootDir": "src"
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+**Production Mode**
+
+In production mode, Payload will first attempt to find the config file in the `outDir` of your `tsconfig.json`, and if not found, will fallback to the `rootDor` directory:
+
+```json
+{
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  "compilerOptions": {
+    "outDir": "dist",
+    "rootDir": "src"
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+If none was in either location, Payload will finally check the `dist` directory.
 
 ### Customizing the Config Location
 
-In addition to the above automated detection, you can specify your own location for the Payload Config. This is done by using the environment variable `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH`. The path you provide via this environment variable can either be absolute or relative to your current working directory. This can be useful in situations where your Payload Config is not in a standard location, or you wish to switch between multiple configurations.
+In addition to the above automated detection, you can specify your own location for the Payload Config. This can be useful in situations where your config is not in a standard location, or you wish to switch between multiple configurations. To do this, Payload exposes an [Environment Variable](..environment-variables) to bypass all automatic config detection.
 
-**Example in package.json:**
+To use a custom config location, set the `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH` environment variable:
 
 ```json
 {
@@ -128,48 +193,75 @@ In addition to the above automated detection, you can specify your own location
 }
 ```
 
-When `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH` is set, Payload will use this path to load the configuration, bypassing all automated detection.
-
-## TypeScript
-
-Payload exposes a variety of TypeScript settings that you can leverage on your Config's `typescript` property.
-
-**`autoGenerate`**
-
-By default, in Next.js development mode, Payload will auto-generate TypeScript interfaces for all collections and globals that your config defines.
-
-You can opt out by setting `typescript.autoGenerate: false`.
-
-**`declare`**
-
-By default, Payload adds a `declare` block to your generated types, which makes sure that Payload uses your generated types for all Local API methods. This promotes strong typing across all of Payload's APIs. However, if you are using your Payload Config in a monorepo sub-package, and you are using it in multiple applications, you might want to disable this automatic declaration and then manually add the `declare` block to a file that you control.
-
-In these cases, you can set `typescript.declare: false` to opt out.
-
-**`outputFile`**
-
-You can control the output path and filename of Payload's auto-generated types by defining the `typescript.outputFile` property to a full, absolute path.
-
-### Importing Payload Config types
-
-You can import config types as follows:
-
-```ts
-import { Config } from 'payload'
-
-// This is the type used for an incoming Payload Config.
-// Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required.
-```
-
-```ts
-import { SanitizedConfig } from 'payload'
-
-// This is the type used after an incoming Payload Config is fully sanitized.
-// Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
-```
+<Banner type="info">
+  <strong>Tip:</strong>
+  `PAYLOAD_CONFIG_PATH` can be either an absolute path, or path relative to your current working directory.
+</Banner>
 
 ## Telemetry
 
 Payload collects **completely anonymous** telemetry data about general usage. This data is super important to us and helps us accurately understand how we're growing and what we can do to build the software into everything that it can possibly be. The telemetry that we collect also help us demonstrate our growth in an accurate manner, which helps us as we seek investment to build and scale our team. If we can accurately demonstrate our growth, we can more effectively continue to support Payload as free and open-source software. To opt out of telemetry, you can pass `telemetry: false` within your Payload Config.
 
 For more information about what we track, take a look at our [privacy policy](/privacy).
+
+## Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS)
+
+Cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) can be configured with either a whitelist array of URLS to allow CORS requests from, a wildcard string (`*`) to accept incoming requests from any domain, or a object with the following properties:
+
+| Option    | Description                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`origins`** | Either a whitelist array of URLS to allow CORS requests from, or a wildcard string (`'*'`) to accept incoming requests from any domain. |
+| **`headers`**  | A list of allowed headers that will be appended in `Access-Control-Allow-Headers`. |
+
+Here's an example showing how to allow incoming requests from any domain:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  cors: '*' // highlight-line
+})
+```
+
+Here's an example showing how to append a new header (`x-custom-header`) in `Access-Control-Allow-Headers`:
+
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  cors: {
+    origins: ['http://localhost:3000']
+    headers: ['x-custom-header']
+  }
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+## TypeScript
+
+You can import types from Payload to help make writing your config easier and type-safe. There are two main types that represent the Payload Config, `Config` and `SanitizedConfig`.
+
+The `Config` type represents a raw Payload Config in its full form. Only the bare minimum properties are marked as required. The `SanitizedConfig` type represents a Payload Config after it has been fully sanitized. Generally, this is only used internally by Payload.
+
+```ts
+import type { Config, SanitizedConfig } from 'payload'
+```
+
+## Server vs. Client
+
+The Payload Config only lives on the server and is not allowed to contain any client-side code. That way, you can load up the Payload Config in any server environment or standalone script, without having to use Bundlers or Node.js loaders to handle importing client-only modules (e.g. scss files or React Components) without any errors.
+
+Behind the curtains, the Next.js-based Admin Panel generates a ClientConfig, which strips away any server-only code and enriches the config with React Components.
+
+## Compatibility flags
+
+The Payload Config can accept compatibility flags for running the newest versions but with older databases. You should only use these flags if you need to, and should confirm that you need to prior to enabling these flags.
+
+`allowLocalizedWithinLocalized`
+
+Payload localization works on a field-by-field basis. As you can nest fields within other fields, you could potentially nest a localized field within a localized field—but this would be redundant and unnecessary. There would be no reason to define a localized field within a localized parent field, given that the entire data structure from the parent field onward would be localized.
+
+By default, Payload will remove the `localized: true` property from sub-fields if a parent field is localized. Set this compatibility flag to `true` only if you have an existing Payload MongoDB database from pre-3.0, and you have nested localized fields that you would like to maintain without migrating.

docs/database/migrations.mdx

@@ -33,10 +33,6 @@ A migration file has two exports - an `up` function, which is called when a migr
 that will be called if for some reason the migration fails to complete successfully. The `up` function should contain
 all changes that you attempt to make within the migration, and the `down` should ideally revert any changes you make.
 
-For an added level of safety, migrations should leverage Payload [transactions](/docs/database/transactions). Migration
-functions should make use of the `req` by adding it to the arguments of your payload local API calls such
-as `payload.create` and database adapter methods like `payload.db.create`.
-
 Here is an example migration file:
 
 ```ts
@@ -53,6 +49,14 @@ export async function down({ payload, req }: MigrateDownArgs): Promise<void> {
 }
 ```
 
+## Using Transactions
+
+When migrations are run, each migration is performed in a new [transactions](/docs/database/transactions) for you. All
+you need to do is pass the `req` object to any [local API](/docs/local-api/overview) or direct database calls, such as
+`payload.db.updateMany()`, to make database changes inside the transaction. Assuming no errors were thrown, the transaction is committed
+after your `up` or `down` function runs. If the migration errors at any point or fails to commit, it is caught and the
+transaction gets aborted. This way no change is made to the database if the migration fails.
+
 ## Migrations Directory
 
 Each DB adapter has an optional property `migrationDir` where you can override where you want your migrations to be
@@ -127,7 +131,7 @@ npm run payload migrate:fresh
 
 ## When to run migrations
 
-Depending on which database adapter you use, your migration workflow might differ subtly.
+Depending on which Database Adapter you use, your migration workflow might differ subtly.
 
 In relational databases, migrations will be **required** for non-development database environments. But with MongoDB, you might only need to run migrations once in a while (or never even need them).
 
@@ -139,7 +143,7 @@ In this case, you can create a migration by running `pnpm payload migrate:create
 
 #### Postgres
 
-In relational databases like Postgres, migrations are a bit more important, because each time you add a new field or a new collection, you'll need to update the shape of your database to match your Payload config (otherwise you'll see errors upon trying to read / write your data).
+In relational databases like Postgres, migrations are a bit more important, because each time you add a new field or a new collection, you'll need to update the shape of your database to match your Payload Config (otherwise you'll see errors upon trying to read / write your data).
 
 That means that Postgres users of Payload should become familiar with the entire migration workflow from top to bottom.
 
@@ -167,14 +171,14 @@ But importantly, you do not need to run migrations against your development data
 
 **2 - create a migration**
 
-Once you're done with working in your Payload config, you can create a migration. It's best practice to try and complete a specific task or fully build out a feature before you create a migration.
+Once you're done with working in your Payload Config, you can create a migration. It's best practice to try and complete a specific task or fully build out a feature before you create a migration.
 
 But once you're ready, you can run `pnpm payload migrate:create`, which will perform the following steps for you:
 
-- We will look for any existing migrations, and automatically generate SQL changes necessary to convert your schema from its prior state to the new state of your Payload config
+- We will look for any existing migrations, and automatically generate SQL changes necessary to convert your schema from its prior state to the new state of your Payload Config
 - We will then create a new migration file in your `/migrations` folder that contains all the SQL necessary to be run
 
-We won't immediately run this migration for you, however. 
+We won't immediately run this migration for you, however.
 
 <Banner type="success">
   Tip: migrations created by Payload are relatively programmatic in nature, so there should not be any surprises, but before you check in the created migration it's a good idea to always double-check the contents of the migration files.
@@ -210,4 +214,33 @@ In the example above, we've specified a `ci` script which we can use as our "bui
 
 This will require that your build pipeline can connect to your database, and it will simply run the `payload migrate` command prior to starting the build process. By calling `payload migrate`, Payload will automatically execute any migrations in your `/migrations` folder that have not yet been executed against your production database, in the order that they were created.
 
-If it fails, the deployment will be rejected. But now, with your build script set up to run your migrations, you will be all set! Next time you deploy, your CI will execute the required migrations for you, and your database will be caught up with the shape that your Payload config requires.
+If it fails, the deployment will be rejected. But now, with your build script set up to run your migrations, you will be all set! Next time you deploy, your CI will execute the required migrations for you, and your database will be caught up with the shape that your Payload Config requires.
+
+## Running migrations in production
+
+In certain cases, you might want to run migrations at runtime when the server starts. Running them during build time may be impossible due to not having access to your database connection while building or similar reasoning.
+
+If you're using a long-running server or container where your Node server starts up one time and then stays initialized, you might prefer to run migrations on server startup instead of within your CI.
+
+In order to run migrations at runtime, on initialization, you can pass your migrations to your database adapter under the `prodMigrations` key as follows:
+
+```ts
+// Import your migrations from the `index.ts` file
+// that Payload generates for you
+import { migrations } from './migrations'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // your config here
+  db: postgresAdapter({
+    //  your adapter config here
+    prodMigrations: migrations
+  })
+})
+```
+
+Passing your migrations as shown above will tell Payload, in production only, to execute any migrations that need to be run prior to completing the initialization of Payload. This is ideal for long-running services where Payload will only be initialized at startup.
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  Warning - if Payload is instructed to run migrations in production, this may slow down serverless cold starts on platforms such as Vercel. Generally, this option should only be used for long-running servers / containers.
+</Banner>

docs/database/mongodb.mdx

@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ keywords: MongoDB, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, he
 To use Payload with MongoDB, install the package `@payloadcms/db-mongodb`. It will come with everything you need to
 store your Payload data in MongoDB.
 
-Then from there, pass it to your Payload config as follows:
+Then from there, pass it to your Payload Config as follows:
 
 ```ts
 import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
@@ -37,6 +37,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 | `disableIndexHints`  | Set to true to disable hinting to MongoDB to use 'id' as index. This is currently done when counting documents for pagination, as it increases the speed of the count function used in that query. Disabling this optimization might fix some problems with AWS DocumentDB. Defaults to false |
 | `migrationDir`       | Customize the directory that migrations are stored. |
 | `transactionOptions` | An object with configuration properties used in [transactions](https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/core/transactions/) or `false` which will disable the use of transactions. |
+| `collation`          | Enable language-specific string comparison with customizable options. Available on MongoDB 3.4+. Defaults locale to "en". Example: `{ strength: 3 }`. For a full list of collation options and their definitions, see the [MongoDB documentation](https://www.mongodb.com/docs/manual/reference/collation/). |
 
 ## Access to Mongoose models
 

docs/database/overview.mdx

@@ -6,20 +6,45 @@ keywords: database, mongodb, postgres, documentation, Content Management System,
 desc: With Payload, you bring your own database and own your data. You have full control.
 ---
 
-Payload interacts with your database via the database adapter that you choose. Right now, Payload officially supports two database adapters:
+Payload is database agnostic, meaning you can use any type of database behind Payload's familiar APIs. Payload is designed to interact with your database through a Database Adapter, which is a thin layer that translates Payload's internal data structures into your database's native data structures.
 
-1. [MongoDB](/docs/database/mongodb) w/ [Mongoose](https://mongoosejs.com/)
-1. [Postgres](/docs/database/postgres) w/ [Drizzle](https://drizzle.team/)
+Currently, Payload officially supports the following Database Adapters:
 
-We will be adding support for SQLite and MySQL in the near future using Drizzle ORM.
+- [MongoDB](/docs/database/mongodb) with [Mongoose](https://mongoosejs.com/)
+- [Postgres](/docs/database/postgres) with [Drizzle](https://drizzle.team/)
+- [SQLite](/docs/database/sqlite) with [Drizzle](https://drizzle.team/)
 
-To use a specific database adapter, you need to install it and configure it according to its own specifications. Visit the documentation for your applicable database adapter to learn more.
+To configure a Database Adapter, use the `db` property in your [Payload Config](../configuration/overview):
 
-## Selecting a database
+```ts
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+import { mongooseAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-mongodb'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  db: mongooseAdapter({
+    url: process.env.DATABASE_URI,
+  }),
+  // highlight-end
+})
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Reminder:</strong>
+  The Database Adapter is an external dependency and must be installed in your project separately from Payload. You can find the installation instructions for each Database Adapter in their respective documentation.
+</Banner>
+
+## Selecting a Database
 
 There are several factors to consider when choosing which database technology and hosting option is right for your project and workload. Payload can theoretically support any database, but it's up to you to decide which database to use.
 
-### When to use MongoDB
+There are two main categories of databases to choose from:
+
+- [Non-Relational Databases](#non-relational-databases)
+- [Relational Databases](#relational-databases)
+
+### Non-Relational Databases
 
 If your project has a lot of dynamic fields, and you are comfortable with allowing Payload to enforce data integrity across your documents, MongoDB is a great choice. With it, your Payload documents are stored as _one_ document in your database—no matter if you have localization enabled, how many block or array fields you have, etc. This means that the shape of your data in your database will very closely reflect your field schema, and there is minimal complexity involved in storing or retrieving your data.
 
@@ -27,47 +52,21 @@ You should prefer MongoDB if:
 
 - You prefer simplicity within your database
 - You don't want to deal with keeping production / staging databases in sync via [DDL changes](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_definition_language)
-- Most (or everything) in your project is localized
-- You leverage a lot of array fields, block fields, or `hasMany` select fields and similar
+- Most (or everything) in your project is [Localized](../configuration/localization)
+- You leverage a lot of [Arrays](../fields/array), [Blocks](../fields/blocks), or `hasMany` [Select](../fields/select) fields
 
-### When to use a relational DB
+### Relational Databases
 
 Many projects might call for more rigid database architecture where the shape of your data is strongly enforced at the database level. For example, if you know the shape of your data and it's relatively "flat", and you don't anticipate it to change often, your workload might suit relational databases like Postgres very well.
 
-You should prefer a relational DB like Postgres if:
+You should prefer a relational DB like Postgres or SQLite if:
 
-- You are comfortable with migration workflows
+- You are comfortable with [Migrations](./migrations)
 - You require enforced data consistency at the database level
 - You have a lot of relationships between collections and require relationships to be enforced
 
-### Differences in Payload features
+## Payload Differences
 
-It's important to note that almost everything Payload does is available in all of our officially supported database adapters, including localization, arrays, blocks, etc.
+It's important to note that nearly every Payload feature is available in all of our officially supported Database Adapters, including [Localization](../configuration/localization), [Arrays](../fields/array), [Blocks](../fields/blocks), etc. The only thing that is not supported in Postgres yet is the [Point Field](/docs/fields/point), but that should be added soon.
 
-The only thing that is not supported in Postgres yet is the [Point field](/docs/fields/point), but that should be added soon.
-
-It's up to you to choose which database you would like to use.
-
-## Configuration
-
-To configure the database for your Payload application, an adapter can be assigned to `config.db`. This property is required within your Payload config.
-
-Here's an example:
-
-```ts
-import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
-
-export default buildConfig({
-  // Your config goes here
-  collections: [
-    // Collections go here
-  ],
-  // Here is where you pass your database adapter
-  // and the adapter will require options specific to itself
-  db: postgresAdapter({
-    pool: {
-      connectionString: process.env.DATABASE_URI,
-    },
-  }),
-})
-```
+It's up to you to choose which database you would like to use based on the requirements of your project. Payload has no opinion on which database you should ultimately choose.

docs/database/postgres.mdx

@@ -2,24 +2,26 @@
 title: Postgres
 label: Postgres
 order: 50
-desc: Payload supports Postgres through an officially supported Drizzle database adapter.
+desc: Payload supports Postgres through an officially supported Drizzle Database Adapter.
 keywords: Postgres, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
 To use Payload with Postgres, install the package `@payloadcms/db-postgres`. It leverages Drizzle ORM and `node-postgres` to interact with a Postgres database that you provide.
 
+Alternatively, the `@payloadcms/db-vercel-postgres` package is also available and is optimized for use with Vercel.
+
 It automatically manages changes to your database for you in development mode, and exposes a full suite of migration controls for you to leverage in order to keep other database environments in sync with your schema. DDL transformations are automatically generated.
 
-To configure Payload to use Postgres, pass the `postgresAdapter` to your Payload config as follows:
+To configure Payload to use Postgres, pass the `postgresAdapter` to your Payload Config as follows:
+
+### Usage
+
+`@payloadcms/db-postgres`:
 
 ```ts
 import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
 
 export default buildConfig({
-  // Your config goes here
-  collections: [
-    // Collections go here
-  ],
   // Configure the Postgres adapter here
   db: postgresAdapter({
     // Postgres-specific arguments go here.
@@ -31,20 +33,38 @@ export default buildConfig({
 })
 ```
 
+`@payloadcms/db-vercel-postgres`:
+
+```ts
+import { vercelPostgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-vercel-postgres'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // Automatically uses proces.env.POSTGRES_URL if no options are provided.
+  db: vercelPostgresAdapter(),
+  // Optionally, can accept the same options as the @vercel/postgres package.
+  db: vercelPostgresAdapter({
+    pool: {
+      connectionString: process.env.DATABASE_URL
+    },
+  }),
+})
+```
+
 ## Options
 
-| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                                           |
-|-----------------------|-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| `pool` \*             | [Pool connection options](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/quick-postgresql/node-postgres) that will be passed to Drizzle and `node-postgres`.                                                           |
-| `push`                | Disable Drizzle's [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push) in development mode. By default, `push` is enabled for development mode only.                      |
-| `migrationDir`        | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                                                   |
-| `logger`              | The instance of the logger to be passed to drizzle. By default Payload's will be used.                                                                                                                |
-| `schemaName`   | A string for the postgres schema to use, defaults to 'public'.                                                                                                                   |
-| `localesSuffix`       | A string appended to the end of table names for storing localized fields. Default is '_locales'.                                                                                                      |
-| `relationshipsSuffix` | A string appended to the end of table names for storing relationships. Default is '_rels'.                                                                                                            |
-| `versionsSuffix`      | A string appended to the end of table names for storing versions. Defaults to '_v'.                                                                                                                   |
-
-
+| Option                      | Description                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| --------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `pool` \*                   | [Pool connection options](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/quick-postgresql/node-postgres) that will be passed to Drizzle and `node-postgres` or to `@vercel/postgres`              |
+| `push`                      | Disable Drizzle's [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push) in development mode. By default, `push` is enabled for development mode only. |
+| `migrationDir`              | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                              |
+| `schemaName` (experimental) | A string for the postgres schema to use, defaults to 'public'.                                                                                                                   |
+| `idType`                    | A string of 'serial', or 'uuid' that is used for the data type given to id columns.                                                                                              |
+| `transactionOptions`        | A PgTransactionConfig object for transactions, or set to `false` to disable using transactions. [More details](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/transactions)                       |
+| `localesSuffix`             | A string appended to the end of table names for storing localized fields. Default is '_locales'.                                                                                 |
+| `relationshipsSuffix`       | A string appended to the end of table names for storing relationships. Default is '_rels'.                                                                                       |
+| `versionsSuffix`            | A string appended to the end of table names for storing versions. Defaults to '_v'.                                                                                              |
+| `beforeSchemaInit`          | Drizzle schema hook. Runs before the schema is built. [More Details](#beforeschemainit)                                                                                          |
+| `afterSchemaInit`           | Drizzle schema hook. Runs after the schema is built. [More Details](#afterschemainit)                                                                                            |
 
 ## Access to Drizzle
 
@@ -68,14 +88,145 @@ In addition to exposing Drizzle directly, all of the tables, Drizzle relations,
 
 Drizzle exposes two ways to work locally in development mode.
 
-The first is [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push), which automatically pushes changes you make to your Payload config (and therefore, Drizzle schema) to your database so you don't have to manually migrate every time you change your Payload config. This only works in development mode, and should not be mixed with manually running [`migrate`](/docs/database/migrations) commands.
+The first is [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push), which automatically pushes changes you make to your Payload Config (and therefore, Drizzle schema) to your database so you don't have to manually migrate every time you change your Payload Config. This only works in development mode, and should not be mixed with manually running [`migrate`](/docs/database/migrations) commands.
 
 You will be warned if any changes that you make will entail data loss while in development mode. Push is enabled by default, but you can opt out if you'd like.
 
-Alternatively, you can disable `push` and rely solely on migrations to keep your local database in sync with your Payload config.
+Alternatively, you can disable `push` and rely solely on migrations to keep your local database in sync with your Payload Config.
 
 ## Migration workflows
 
 In Postgres, migrations are a fundamental aspect of working with Payload and you should become familiar with how they work.
 
 For more information about migrations, [click here](/docs/beta/database/migrations#when-to-run-migrations).
+
+## Drizzle schema hooks
+
+### beforeSchemaInit
+
+Runs before the schema is built. You can use this hook to extend your database structure with tables that won't be managed by Payload.
+
+```ts
+import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
+import { integer, pgTable, serial } from 'drizzle-orm/pg-core'
+
+postgresAdapter({
+  beforeSchemaInit: [
+    ({ schema, adapter }) => {
+      return {
+        ...schema,
+        tables: {
+          ...schema.tables,
+          addedTable: pgTable('added_table', {
+            id: serial('id').notNull(),
+          }),
+        },
+      }
+    },
+  ],
+})
+```
+
+One use case is preserving your existing database structure when migrating to Payload. By default, Payload drops the current database schema, which may not be desirable in this scenario.
+To quickly generate the Drizzle schema from your database you can use [Drizzle Introspection](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/commands#introspect--pull)
+You should get the `schema.ts` file which may look like this:
+
+```ts
+import { pgTable, uniqueIndex, serial, varchar, text } from 'drizzle-orm/pg-core'
+
+export const users = pgTable('users', {
+  id: serial('id').primaryKey(),
+  fullName: text('full_name'),
+  phone: varchar('phone', { length: 256 }),
+})
+
+export const countries = pgTable(
+  'countries',
+  {
+    id: serial('id').primaryKey(),
+    name: varchar('name', { length: 256 }),
+  },
+  (countries) => {
+    return {
+      nameIndex: uniqueIndex('name_idx').on(countries.name),
+    }
+  },
+)
+
+```
+
+You can import them into your config and append to the schema with the `beforeSchemaInit` hook like this:
+
+```ts
+import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
+import { users, countries } from '../drizzle/schema'
+
+postgresAdapter({
+  beforeSchemaInit: [
+    ({ schema, adapter }) => {
+      return {
+        ...schema,
+        tables: {
+          ...schema.tables,
+          users,
+          countries
+        },
+      }
+    },
+  ],
+})
+```
+
+Make sure Payload doesn't overlap table names with its collections. For example, if you already have a collection with slug "users", you should either change the slug or `dbName` to change the table name for this collection. 
+
+
+### afterSchemaInit
+
+Runs after the Drizzle schema is built. You can use this hook to modify the schema with features that aren't supported by Payload, or if you want to add a column that you don't want to be in the Payload config.
+To extend a table, Payload exposes `extendTable` utillity to the args. You can refer to the [Drizzle documentation](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/sql-schema-declaration).
+The following example adds the `extra_integer_column` column and a composite index on `country` and `city` columns.
+
+```ts
+import { postgresAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-postgres'
+import { index, integer } from 'drizzle-orm/pg-core'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  collections: [
+    {
+      slug: 'places',
+      fields: [
+        {
+          name: 'country',
+          type: 'text',
+        },
+        {
+          name: 'city',
+          type: 'text',
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  db: postgresAdapter({
+    afterSchemaInit: [
+      ({ schema, extendTable, adapter }) => {
+        extendTable({
+          table: schema.tables.places,
+          columns: {
+            extraIntegerColumn: integer('extra_integer_column'),
+          },
+          extraConfig: (table) => ({
+            country_city_composite_index: index('country_city_composite_index').on(
+              table.country,
+              table.city,
+            ),
+          }),
+        })
+
+        return schema
+      },
+    ],
+  }),
+})
+
+```

docs/database/sqlite.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,212 @@
+---
+title: SQLite
+label: SQLite
+order: 60
+desc: Payload supports SQLite through an officially supported Drizzle Database Adapter.
+keywords: SQLite, documentation, typescript, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+To use Payload with SQLite, install the package `@payloadcms/db-sqlite`. It leverages Drizzle ORM and `libSQL` to interact with a SQLite database that you provide.
+
+It automatically manages changes to your database for you in development mode, and exposes a full suite of migration controls for you to leverage in order to keep other database environments in sync with your schema. DDL transformations are automatically generated.
+
+To configure Payload to use SQLite, pass the `sqliteAdapter` to your Payload Config as follows:
+
+```ts
+import { sqliteAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-sqlite'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  // Your config goes here
+  collections: [
+    // Collections go here
+  ],
+  // Configure the SQLite adapter here
+  db: sqliteAdapter({
+    // SQLite-specific arguments go here.
+    // `client.url` is required.
+    client: {
+      url: process.env.DATABASE_URL,
+      authToken: process.env.DATABASE_AUTH_TOKEN,
+    }
+  }),
+})
+```
+
+## Options
+
+| Option                | Description                                                                                                                                                                      |
+| --------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `client` \*           | [Client connection options](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/get-started-sqlite#turso) that will be passed to `createClient` from `@libsql/client`.                                 |
+| `push`                | Disable Drizzle's [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push) in development mode. By default, `push` is enabled for development mode only. |
+| `migrationDir`        | Customize the directory that migrations are stored.                                                                                                                              |
+| `logger`              | The instance of the logger to be passed to drizzle. By default Payload's will be used.                                                                                           |
+| `transactionOptions`  | A SQLiteTransactionConfig object for transactions, or set to `false` to disable using transactions. [More details](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/transactions)                   |
+| `localesSuffix`       | A string appended to the end of table names for storing localized fields. Default is '_locales'.                                                                                 |
+| `relationshipsSuffix` | A string appended to the end of table names for storing relationships. Default is '_rels'.                                                                                       |
+| `versionsSuffix`      | A string appended to the end of table names for storing versions. Defaults to '_v'.                                                                                              |
+| `beforeSchemaInit`    | Drizzle schema hook. Runs before the schema is built. [More Details](#beforeschemainit)                                                                                          |
+| `afterSchemaInit`     | Drizzle schema hook. Runs after the schema is built. [More Details](#afterschemainit)                                                                                            |
+
+## Access to Drizzle
+
+After Payload is initialized, this adapter will expose the full power of Drizzle to you for use if you need it.
+
+You can access Drizzle as follows:
+
+```text
+payload.db.drizzle
+```
+
+## Tables and relations
+
+In addition to exposing Drizzle directly, all of the tables and Drizzle relations are exposed for you via the `payload.db` property as well.
+
+- Tables - `payload.db.tables`
+- Relations - `payload.db.relations`
+
+## Prototyping in development mode
+
+Drizzle exposes two ways to work locally in development mode.
+
+The first is [`db push`](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/overview#prototyping-with-db-push), which automatically pushes changes you make to your Payload Config (and therefore, Drizzle schema) to your database so you don't have to manually migrate every time you change your Payload Config. This only works in development mode, and should not be mixed with manually running [`migrate`](/docs/database/migrations) commands.
+
+You will be warned if any changes that you make will entail data loss while in development mode. Push is enabled by default, but you can opt out if you'd like.
+
+Alternatively, you can disable `push` and rely solely on migrations to keep your local database in sync with your Payload Config.
+
+## Migration workflows
+
+In SQLite, migrations are a fundamental aspect of working with Payload and you should become familiar with how they work.
+
+For more information about migrations, [click here](/docs/beta/database/migrations#when-to-run-migrations).
+
+## Drizzle schema hooks
+
+### beforeSchemaInit
+
+Runs before the schema is built. You can use this hook to extend your database structure with tables that won't be managed by Payload.
+
+```ts
+import { sqliteAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-sqlite'
+import { integer, sqliteTable } from 'drizzle-orm/sqlite-core'
+
+sqliteAdapter({
+  beforeSchemaInit: [
+    ({ schema, adapter }) => {
+      return {
+        ...schema,
+        tables: {
+          ...schema.tables,
+          addedTable: sqliteTable('added_table', {
+            id: integer('id').primaryKey({ autoIncrement: true }),
+          }),
+        },
+      }
+    },
+  ],
+})
+```
+
+One use case is preserving your existing database structure when migrating to Payload. By default, Payload drops the current database schema, which may not be desirable in this scenario.
+To quickly generate the Drizzle schema from your database you can use [Drizzle Introspection](https://orm.drizzle.team/kit-docs/commands#introspect--pull)
+You should get the `schema.ts` file which may look like this:
+
+```ts
+import { sqliteTable, text, uniqueIndex, integer } from 'drizzle-orm/sqlite-core'
+
+export const users = sqliteTable('users', {
+  id: integer('id').primaryKey({ autoIncrement: true }),
+  fullName: text('full_name'),
+  phone: text('phone', {length: 256}),
+})
+
+export const countries = sqliteTable(
+  'countries',
+  {
+    id: integer('id').primaryKey({ autoIncrement: true }),
+    name: text('name', { length: 256 }),
+  },
+  (countries) => {
+    return {
+      nameIndex: uniqueIndex('name_idx').on(countries.name),
+    }
+  },
+)
+
+```
+
+You can import them into your config and append to the schema with the `beforeSchemaInit` hook like this:
+
+```ts
+import { sqliteAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-sqlite'
+import { users, countries } from '../drizzle/schema'
+
+sqliteAdapter({
+  beforeSchemaInit: [
+    ({ schema, adapter }) => {
+      return {
+        ...schema,
+        tables: {
+          ...schema.tables,
+          users,
+          countries
+        },
+      }
+    },
+  ],
+})
+```
+
+Make sure Payload doesn't overlap table names with its collections. For example, if you already have a collection with slug "users", you should either change the slug or `dbName` to change the table name for this collection. 
+
+
+### afterSchemaInit
+
+Runs after the Drizzle schema is built. You can use this hook to modify the schema with features that aren't supported by Payload, or if you want to add a column that you don't want to be in the Payload config.
+To extend a table, Payload exposes `extendTable` utillity to the args. You can refer to the [Drizzle documentation](https://orm.drizzle.team/docs/sql-schema-declaration).
+The following example adds the `extra_integer_column` column and a composite index on `country` and `city` columns.
+
+```ts
+import { sqliteAdapter } from '@payloadcms/db-sqlite'
+import { index, integer } from 'drizzle-orm/sqlite-core'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export default buildConfig({
+  collections: [
+    {
+      slug: 'places',
+      fields: [
+        {
+          name: 'country',
+          type: 'text',
+        },
+        {
+          name: 'city',
+          type: 'text',
+        },
+      ],
+    },
+  ],
+  db: sqliteAdapter({
+    afterSchemaInit: [
+      ({ schema, extendTable, adapter }) => {
+        extendTable({
+          table: schema.tables.places,
+          columns: {
+            extraIntegerColumn: integer('extra_integer_column'),
+          },
+          extraConfig: (table) => ({
+            country_city_composite_index: index('country_city_composite_index').on(
+              table.country,
+              table.city,
+            ),
+          }),
+        })
+
+        return schema
+      },
+    ],
+  }),
+})
+
+```

docs/database/transactions.mdx

@@ -68,3 +68,49 @@ The following functions can be used for managing transactions:
 `payload.db.beginTransaction` - Starts a new session and returns a transaction ID for use in other Payload Local API calls.
 `payload.db.commitTransaction` - Takes the identifier for the transaction, finalizes any changes.
 `payload.db.rollbackTransaction` - Takes the identifier for the transaction, discards any changes.
+
+Payload uses the `req` object to pass the transaction ID through to the database adapter. If you are not using the `req` object, you can make a new object to pass the transaction ID directly to database adapter methods and local API calls.
+Example:
+
+```ts
+import payload from 'payload'
+import config from './payload.config'
+
+const standalonePayloadScript = async () => {
+  // initialize Payload
+  await payload.init({ config })
+
+  const transactionID = await payload.db.beginTransaction()
+
+  try {
+    // Make an update using the local API
+    await payload.update({
+      collection: 'posts',
+      data: {
+        some: 'data',
+      },
+      where: {
+        slug: { equals: 'my-slug' }
+      },
+      req: { transactionID },
+    })
+
+    /*
+      You can make additional db changes or run other functions
+      that need to be committed on an all or nothing basis
+     */
+
+    // Commit the transaction
+    await payload.db.commitTransaction(transactionID)
+  } catch (error) {
+    // Rollback the transaction
+    await payload.db.rollbackTransaction(transactionID)
+  }
+}
+
+standalonePayloadScript()
+```
+
+## Disabling Transactions
+
+If you wish to disable transactions entirely, you can do so by passing `false` as the `transactionOptions` in your database adapter configuration. All the official Payload database adapters support this option.

docs/email/overview.mdx

@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ keywords: email, overview, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managem
 
 Payload has a few email adapters that can be imported to enable email functionality. The [@payloadcms/email-nodemailer](https://www.npmjs.com/package/@payloadcms/email-nodemailer) package will be the package most will want to install. This package provides an easy way to use [Nodemailer](https://nodemailer.com) for email and won't get in your way for those already familiar.
 
-The email adapter should be passed into the `email` property of the Payload config. This will allow Payload to send emails for things like password resets, new user verification, and any other email sending needs you may have.
+The email adapter should be passed into the `email` property of the Payload Config. This will allow Payload to send [auth-related emails](../authentication/email) for things like password resets, new user verification, and any other email sending needs you may have.
 
 ## Configuration
 
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) options can be passed in using the `transpo
 **Example email options using SMTP:**
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { nodemailerAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-nodemailer'
 
 export default buildConfig({
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 **Example email options using nodemailer.createTransport:**
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { nodemailerAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-nodemailer'
 import nodemailer from 'nodemailer'
 
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ You also have the ability to bring your own nodemailer transport. This is an exa
 
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { nodemailerAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-nodemailer'
 import nodemailerSendgrid from 'nodemailer-sendgrid'
 
@@ -136,7 +136,7 @@ The Resend adapter requires an API key to be passed in the options. This can be
 | apiKey | The API key for the Resend service. |
 
 ```ts
-import { buildConfig } from 'payload/config'
+import { buildConfig } from 'payload'
 import { resendAdapter } from '@payloadcms/email-resend'
 
 export default buildConfig({
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ export default buildConfig({
 
 ## Sending Mail
 
-With a working transport you can call it anywhere you have access to payload by calling `payload.sendEmail(message)`. The `message` will contain the `to`, `subject` and `html` or `text` for the email being sent. Other options are also available and can be seen in the sendEmail args. Support for these will depend on the adapter being used.
+With a working transport you can call it anywhere you have access to Payload by calling `payload.sendEmail(message)`. The `message` will contain the `to`, `subject` and `html` or `text` for the email being sent. Other options are also available and can be seen in the sendEmail args. Support for these will depend on the adapter being used.
 
 ```ts
 // Example of sending an email

docs/examples/overview.mdx

@@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ Payload provides a vast array of examples to help you get started with your proj
 Examples are changing every day, so be sure to check back often to see what new examples have been added. If you have a specific example you would like to see, please feel free to start a new [Discussion](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/discussions) or open a new [PR](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/pulls) to add it yourself.
 
 - [Auth](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/auth)
+- [Custom Components](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/custom-components)
 - [Custom Server](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/custom-server)
 - [Draft Preview](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/draft-preview)
 - [Email](https://github.com/payloadcms/payload/tree/main/examples/email)

docs/fields/array.mdx

@@ -2,57 +2,84 @@
 title: Array Field
 label: Array
 order: 20
-desc: Array fields are intended for sets of repeating fields, that you define. Learn how to use array fields, see examples and options.
+desc: Array Fields are intended for sets of repeating fields, that you define. Learn how to use Array Fields, see examples and options.
 keywords: array, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Array field type is used when you need to have a set of "repeating" fields. It stores an array
-  of objects containing the fields that you define. Its uses can be simple or highly complex.
-</Banner>
+The Array Field is used when you need to have a set of "repeating" [Fields](./overview). It stores an array of objects containing fields that you define. These fields can be of any type, including other arrays to achieve infinitely nested structures.
 
-<LightDarkImage
-  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array.png"
-  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array-dark.png"
-  alt="Array field with two Rows in Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of an Array field with two Rows"
-/>
-
-**Example uses:**
+Arrays are useful for many different types of content from simple to complex, such as:
 
 - A "slider" with an image ([upload field](/docs/fields/upload)) and a caption ([text field](/docs/fields/text))
 - Navigational structures where editors can specify nav items containing pages ([relationship field](/docs/fields/relationship)), an "open in new tab" [checkbox field](/docs/fields/checkbox)
 - Event agenda "timeslots" where you need to specify start & end time ([date field](/docs/fields/date)), label ([text field](/docs/fields/text)), and Learn More page [relationship](/docs/fields/relationship)
 
-## Config
+<LightDarkImage
+  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array.png"
+  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/array-dark.png"
+  alt="Array field with two Rows in Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of an Array field with two Rows"
+/>
+
+To create an Array Field, set the `type` to `array` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyArrayField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'array',
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+  ],
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
 | ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as the heading in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as the heading in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) or an object with keys for each language. Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                |
 | **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types to correspond to each row of the Array.                                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                  |
 | **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
 | **`maxRows`**          | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                                                                                                            |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                                              |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                 |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                                   |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide an array of row data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                               |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this Array will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
 | **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                |
 | **`labels`**           | Customize the row labels appearing in the Admin dashboard.                                                                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
 | **`interfaceName`**    | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas).                                                                                                |
-| **`dbName`**           | Custom table name for the field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`dbName`**           | Custom table name for the field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                                                                                                                    |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                                                                                                                   |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Admin Config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Array Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyArrayField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Array Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
 | Option                    | Description                                                                                                          |
 | ------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -62,10 +89,10 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 
 ## Example
 
-`collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
+In this example, we have an Array Field called `slider` that contains a set of fields for a simple image slider. Each row in the array has a `title`, `image`, and `caption`. We also customize the row label to display the title if it exists, or a default label if it doesn't.
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/blocks.mdx

@@ -2,16 +2,17 @@
 title: Blocks Field
 label: Blocks
 order: 30
-desc: The Blocks field type is a great layout build and can be used to construct any flexible content model. Learn how to use Block fields, see examples and options.
+desc: The Blocks Field is a great layout build and can be used to construct any flexible content model. Learn how to use Block Fields, see examples and options.
 keywords: blocks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Blocks field type is <strong>incredibly powerful</strong> and can be used as a{' '}
-  <em>layout builder</em> as well as to define any other flexible content model you can think of. It
-  stores an array of objects, where each object must match the shape of one of your provided block
-  configs.
-</Banner>
+The Blocks Field is <strong>incredibly powerful</strong>, storing an array of objects based on the fields that your define, where each item in the array is a "block" with its own unique schema.
+
+Blocks are a great way to create a flexible content model that can be used to build a wide variety of content types, including:
+
+- A layout builder tool that grants editors to design highly customizable page or post layouts. Blocks could include configs such as `Quote`, `CallToAction`, `Slider`, `Content`, `Gallery`, or others.
+- A form builder tool where available block configs might be `Text`, `Select`, or `Checkbox`.
+- Virtual event agenda "timeslots" where a timeslot could either be a `Break`, a `Presentation`, or a `BreakoutSession`.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/blocks.png"
@@ -20,13 +21,23 @@ keywords: blocks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manageme
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of add Blocks drawer view"
 />
 
-**Example uses:**
+To add a Blocks Field, set the `type` to `blocks` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-- A layout builder tool that grants editors to design highly customizable page or post layouts. Blocks could include configs such as `Quote`, `CallToAction`, `Slider`, `Content`, `Gallery`, or others.
-- A form builder tool where available block configs might be `Text`, `Select`, or `Checkbox`.
-- Virtual event agenda "timeslots" where a timeslot could either be a `Break`, a `Presentation`, or a `BreakoutSession`.
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-## Field config
+export const MyBlocksField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'blocks',
+  blocks: [
+    // ...
+  ],
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
 | ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -36,30 +47,44 @@ keywords: blocks, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manageme
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
 | **`minRows`**          | A number for the fewest allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
 | **`maxRows`**          | A number for the most allowed items during validation when a value is present.                                                                                                                                                                                                     |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-level hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-level access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                                                                                                            |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                                              |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                 |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API response or the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                          |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide an array of block data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                             |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this field will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
 | **`labels`**           | Customize the block row labels appearing in the Admin dashboard.                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                                                                                                                   |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Admin Config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Blocks Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyBlocksField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Blocks Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
 | Option              | Description                        |
 | ------------------- | ---------------------------------- |
 | **`initCollapsed`**    | Set the initial collapsed state |
 | **`isSortable`**       | Disable order sorting by setting this value to `false` |
 
-## Block configs
+## Block Configs
 
 Blocks are defined as separate configs of their own.
 
@@ -82,7 +107,7 @@ Blocks are defined as separate configs of their own.
 | **`imageAltText`**         | Customize this block's image thumbnail alt text.                                                                                                                                    |
 | **`interfaceName`**        | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas). |
 | **`graphQL.singularName`** | Text to use for the GraphQL schema name. Auto-generated from slug if not defined. NOTE: this is set for deprecation, prefer `interfaceName`.                                        |
-| **`dbName`**               | Custom table name for this block type when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
+| **`dbName`**               | Custom table name for this block type when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from slug if not defined.
 | **`custom`**               | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                           |
 
 ### Auto-generated data per block
@@ -102,7 +127,7 @@ The Admin Panel provides each block with a `blockName` field which optionally al
 `collections/ExampleCollection.js`
 
 ```ts
-import { Block, CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { Block, CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 const QuoteBlock: Block = {
   slug: 'Quote', // required
@@ -145,5 +170,5 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 As you build your own Block configs, you might want to store them in separate files but retain typing accordingly. To do so, you can import and use Payload's `Block` type:
 
 ```ts
-import type { Block } from 'payload/types'
+import type { Block } from 'payload'
 ```

docs/fields/checkbox.mdx

@@ -6,16 +6,27 @@ desc: Checkbox field types allow the developer to save a boolean value in the da
 keywords: checkbox, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>The Checkbox field type saves a boolean in the database.</Banner>
+The Checkbox Field saves a boolean in the database.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/checkbox.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/checkbox-dark.png"
-  alt="Checkbox field with text field in Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Checkbox field with text field in Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of Checkbox field with Text field below"
 />
 
-## Config
+To add a Checkbox Field, set the `type` to `checkbox` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyCheckboxField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'checkbox', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -23,25 +34,26 @@ keywords: checkbox, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manage
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                             |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                       |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                          |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value, will default to false if field is also `required`. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                     |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
 | **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                    |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](../admin/fields#admin-options).                                                                                                |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 ## Example
 
-`collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
+Here is an example of a Checkbox Field in a Collection:
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/code.mdx

@@ -7,21 +7,27 @@ desc: The Code field type will store any string in the Database. Learn how to us
 keywords: code, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Code field type saves a string in the database, but provides the Admin Panel with a code
-  editor styled interface.
-</Banner>
+The Code Field saves a string in the database, but provides the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) with a code editor styled interface.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/code.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/code-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Code field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Code field"
+  alt="Shows a Code field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="This field is using the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting."
 />
 
-This field uses the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting.
+To add a Code Field, set the `type` to `code` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-## Config
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyBlocksField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'code', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -32,22 +38,36 @@ This field uses the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting.
 | **`minLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a minimum character length.                                                                                 |
 | **`maxLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                             |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                       |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                          |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
 | **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-options).                                                                                                  |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Admin Config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Code Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyCodeField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Code Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
 | Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                     |
 | ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -59,7 +79,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/collapsible.mdx

@@ -6,32 +6,58 @@ desc: With the Collapsible field, you can place fields within a collapsible layo
 keywords: row, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Collapsible field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin Panel. By using it, you
-  can place fields within a nice layout component that can be collapsed / expanded.
-</Banner>
+The Collapsible Field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin Panel. By using it, you can place fields within a nice layout component that can be collapsed / expanded.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/collapsible.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/collapsible-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Collapsible field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Collapsible field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Collapsible field"
 />
 
-## Config
+To add a Collapsible Field, set the `type` to `collapsible` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyCollapsibleField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'collapsible',
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+  ],
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option          | Description                                                                                                                                                                  |
 | --------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`label`** \*  | A label to render within the header of the collapsible component. This can be a string, function or react component. Function/components receive `({ data, path })` as args. |
 | **`fields`** \* | Array of field types to nest within this Collapsible.                                                                                                                        |
-| **`admin`**     | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                    |
+| **`admin`**     | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                    |
 | **`custom`**    | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                    |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Admin Config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Collapsible Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyCollapsibleField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Collapsible Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
 | Option              | Description                     |
 | ------------------- | ------------------------------- |
@@ -42,7 +68,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/date.mdx

@@ -6,21 +6,27 @@ desc: The Date field type stores a Date in the database. Learn how to use and cu
 keywords: date, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Date field type saves a Date in the database and provides the Admin Panel with a customizable
-  time picker interface.
-</Banner>
+The Date Field saves a Date in the database and provides the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) with a customizable time picker interface.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/date.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/date-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Date field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Date field"
+  alt="Shows a Date field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="This field is using the `react-datepicker` component for UI."
 />
 
-This field uses [`react-datepicker`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/react-datepicker) for the Admin Panel component.
+To add a Date Field, set the `type` to `date` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-## Config
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyDateField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'date', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -28,22 +34,36 @@ This field uses [`react-datepicker`](https://www.npmjs.com/package/react-datepic
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                             |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                       |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                          |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
 | **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                               |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Admin Config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can customize the following fields that will adjust how the component displays in the admin panel via the `date` property.
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Date Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyDateField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Date Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
 | Property                       | Description                                                                                                                            |
 | ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -77,7 +97,7 @@ When only `pickerAppearance` is set, an equivalent format will be rendered in th
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/email.mdx

@@ -6,16 +6,27 @@ desc: The Email field enforces that the value provided is a valid email address.
 keywords: email, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>The Email field enforces that the value provided is a valid email address.</Banner>
+The Email Field enforces that the value provided is a valid email address.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/email.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/email-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows an Email field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows an Email field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of an Email field"
 />
 
-## Config
+To create an Email Field, set the `type` to `email` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyEmailField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'email', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -24,37 +35,48 @@ keywords: email, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                             |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                       |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                          |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
 | **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                               |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), this field type allows for the following `admin` properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Email Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`placeholder`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set this property to define a placeholder string for the field.
+export const MyEmailField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-**`autoComplete`**
+The Email Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`placeholder`**              | Set this property to define a placeholder string for the field.                                                                         |
+| **`autoComplete`**             | Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.                                                               |
 
 ## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/group.mdx

@@ -6,19 +6,32 @@ desc: The Group field allows other fields to be nested under a common property.
 keywords: group, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Group field allows fields to be nested under a common property name. It also groups fields
-  together visually in the Admin Panel.
-</Banner>
+The Group Field allows [Fields](./overview) to be nested under a common property name. It also groups fields together visually in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/group.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/group-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Group field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Group field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Group field"
 />
 
-## Config
+To add a Group Field, set the `type` to `group` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyGroupField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'group',
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+  ],
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
 | ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -26,33 +39,47 @@ keywords: group, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 | **`fields`** \*        | Array of field types to nest within this Group.                                                                                                                                                                                                                                    |
 | **`label`**            | Used as a heading in the Admin Panel and to name the generated GraphQL type.                                                                                                                                                                                                       |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                      |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                                                                                                            |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                                                                                                              |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                                                                                                                 |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                                                                                                                   |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide an object of data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                                                                                                  |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config. If enabled, a separate, localized set of all data within this Group will be kept, so there is no need to specify each nested field as `localized`. |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                                                                                                                                      |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                                                                                                          |
 | **`interfaceName`**    | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas).                                                                                                |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                                                                                                        |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                                                                                                                   |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Group allows for the following admin property:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Group Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`hideGutter`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the admin panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter.
+export const MyGroupField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Group Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
+
+| Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+| ------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`hideGutter`**    | Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the Admin Panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter. |
 
 ## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/join.mdx

@@ -0,0 +1,242 @@
+---
+title: Join Field
+label: Join
+order: 140
+desc: The Join field provides the ability to work on related documents. Learn how to use Join field, see examples and options.
+keywords: join, relationship, junction, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
+---
+
+The Join Field is used to make Relationship fields in the opposite direction. It is used to show the relationship from
+the other side. The field itself acts as a virtual field, in that no new data is stored on the collection with a Join
+field. Instead, the Admin UI surfaces the related documents for a better editing experience and is surfaced by Payload's
+APIs.
+
+The Join field is useful in scenarios including:
+
+- To surface `Order`s for a given `Product`
+- To view and edit `Posts` belonging to a `Category`
+- To work with any bi-directional relationship data
+
+<LightDarkImage
+  srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/join.png"
+  srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/join-dark.png"
+  alt="Shows Join field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of Join field"
+/>
+
+For the Join field to work, you must have an existing [relationship](./relationship) field in the collection you are
+joining. This will reference the collection and path of the field of the related documents.
+To add a Relationship Field, set the `type` to `join` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyJoinField: Field = {
+  // highlight-start
+  name: 'relatedPosts',
+  type: 'join',
+  collection: 'posts',
+  on: 'category',
+  // highlight-end
+}
+
+// relationship field in another collection:
+export const MyRelationshipField: Field = {
+  name: 'category',
+  type: 'relationship',
+  relationTo: 'categories',
+}
+```
+
+In this example, the field is defined to show the related `posts` when added to a `category` collection. The `on`
+property is used to
+specify the relationship field name of the field that relates to the collection document.
+
+With this example, if you navigate to a Category in the Admin UI or an API response, you'll now see that the Posts which
+are related to the Category are populated for you. This is extremely powerful and can be used to define a wide variety
+of relationship types in an easy manner.
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  The Join field is extremely performant and does not add additional query overhead to your API responses until you add depth of 1 or above. It works in all database adapters. In MongoDB, we use <strong>aggregations</strong> to automatically join in related documents, and in relational databases, we use joins.
+</Banner>
+
+### Schema advice
+
+When modeling your database, you might come across many places where you'd like to feature bi-directional relationships.
+But here's an important consideration—you generally only want to store information about a given relationship in _one_
+place.
+
+Let's take the Posts and Categories example. It makes sense to define which category a post belongs to while editing the
+post.
+
+It would generally not be necessary to have a list of post IDs stored directly on the category as well, for a few
+reasons:
+
+- You want to have a "single source of truth" for relationships, and not worry about keeping two sources in sync with
+  one another
+- If you have hundreds, thousands, or even millions of posts, you would not want to store all of those post IDs on a
+  given category
+- Etc.
+
+This is where the `join` field is especially powerful. With it, you only need to store the `category_id` on the `post`,
+and Payload will automatically join in related posts for you when you query for categories. The related category is only
+stored on the post itself - and is not duplicated on both sides. However, the `join` field is what enables
+bi-directional APIs and UI for you.
+
+### Using the Join field to have full control of your database schema
+
+For typical polymorphic / many relationships, if you're using Postgres or SQLite, Payload will automatically create
+a `posts_rels` table, which acts as a junction table to store all of a given document's relationships.
+
+However, this might not be appropriate for your use case if you'd like to have more control over your database
+architecture. You might not want to have that `_rels` table, and would prefer to maintain / control your own junction
+table design.
+
+<Banner type="success">
+  With the Join field, you can control your own junction table design, and avoid Payload's automatic _rels table creation.
+</Banner>
+
+The `join` field can be used in conjunction with _any_ collection - and if you wanted to define your own "junction"
+collection, which, say, is called `categories_posts` and has a `post_id` and a `category_id` column, you can achieve
+complete control over the shape of that junction table.
+
+You could go a step further and leverage the `admin.hidden` property of the `categories_posts` collection to hide the
+collection from appearing in the Admin UI navigation.
+
+#### Specifying additional fields on relationships
+
+Another very powerful use case of the `join` field is to be able to define "context" fields on your relationships. Let's
+say that you have Posts and Categories, and use join fields on both your Posts and Categories collection to join in
+related docs from a new pseudo-junction collection called `categories_posts`. Now, the relations are stored in this
+third junction collection, and can be surfaced on both Posts and Categories. But, importantly, you could add
+additional "context" fields to this shared junction collection.
+
+For example, on this `categories_posts` collection, in addition to having the `category` and
+post` fields, we could add custom "context" fields like `featured` or `
+spotlight`, which would allow you to store additional information directly on relationships. The `join` field gives you
+complete control over any type of relational architecture in Payload, all wrapped up in a powerful Admin UI.
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                   |
+|------------------------|-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                                   |
+| **`collection`** \*    | The `slug`s having the relationship field.                                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`on`** \*            | The relationship field name of the field that relates to collection document. Use dot notation for nested paths, like 'myGroup.relationName'.                                                 |
+| **`maxDepth`**         | Default is 1, Sets a maximum population depth for this field, regardless of the remaining depth when this field is reached. [Max Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#field-level-max-depth) |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                                       |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                         |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                            |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                               |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                           |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration.                                                                                                                                                                 |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                     |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                   |
+
+_\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
+
+## Join Field Data
+
+When a document is returned that for a Join field is populated with related documents. The structure returned is an
+object with:
+
+- `docs` an array of related documents or only IDs if the depth is reached
+- `hasNextPage` a boolean indicating if there are additional documents
+
+```json
+{
+  "id": "66e3431a3f23e684075aae9c",
+  "relatedPosts": {
+    "docs": [
+      {
+        "id": "66e3431a3f23e684075aaeb9",
+        // other fields...
+        "category": "66e3431a3f23e684075aae9c",
+      },
+      // { ... }
+    ],
+    "hasNextPage": false
+  },
+  // other fields...
+}
+```
+
+## Query Options
+
+The Join Field supports custom queries to filter, sort, and limit the related documents that will be returned. In
+addition to the specific query options for each Join Field, you can pass `joins: false` to disable all Join Field from
+returning. This is useful for performance reasons when you don't need the related documents.
+
+The following query options are supported:
+
+| Property    | Description                                                  |
+|-------------|--------------------------------------------------------------|
+| **`limit`** | The maximum related documents to be returned, default is 10. |
+| **`where`** | An optional `Where` query to filter joined documents.        |
+| **`sort`**  | A string used to order related results                       |
+
+These can be applied to the local API, GraphQL, and REST API.
+
+### Local API
+
+By adding `joins` to the local API you can customize the request for each join field by the `name` of the field.
+
+```js
+const result = await db.findOne('categories', {
+  where: {
+    title: {
+      equals: 'My Category'
+    }
+  },
+  joins: {
+    relatedPosts: {
+      limit: 5,
+      where: {
+        title: {
+          equals: 'My Post'
+        }
+      },
+      sort: 'title'
+    }
+  }
+})
+```
+
+### Rest API
+
+The rest API supports the same query options as the local API. You can use the `joins` query parameter to customize the
+request for each join field by the `name` of the field. For example, an API call to get a document with the related
+posts limited to 5 and sorted by title:
+
+`/api/categories/${id}?joins[relatedPosts][limit]=5&joins[relatedPosts][sort]=title`
+
+You can specify as many `joins` parameters as needed for the same or different join fields for a single request.
+
+### GraphQL
+
+The GraphQL API supports the same query options as the local and REST APIs. You can specify the query options for each join field in your query.
+
+Example:
+
+```graphql
+query {
+  Categories {
+    docs {
+      relatedPosts(
+        sort: "createdAt"
+        limit: 5
+        where: {
+          author: {
+              equals: "66e3431a3f23e684075aaeb9"
+            }
+          }
+      ) {
+        docs {
+          title
+        }
+        hasNextPage
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
+```

docs/fields/json.mdx

@@ -7,21 +7,27 @@ desc: The JSON field type will store any string in the Database. Learn how to us
 keywords: json, jsonSchema, schema, validation, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The JSON field type saves actual JSON in the database, which differs from the Code field that
-  saves the value as a string in the database.
-</Banner>
+The JSON Field saves actual JSON in the database, which differs from the Code field that saves the value as a string in the database.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/json.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/json-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a JSON field in the Payload admin panel"
-  caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a JSON field"
+  alt="Shows a JSON field in the Payload Admin Panel"
+  caption="This field is using the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting."
 />
 
-This field uses the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting.
+To add a JSON Field, set the `type` to `json` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-## Config
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyJSONField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'json', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -31,22 +37,36 @@ This field uses the `monaco-react` editor syntax highlighting.
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
 | **`jsonSchema`**       | Provide a JSON schema that will be used for validation. [JSON schemas](https://json-schema.org/learn/getting-started-step-by-step)                                          |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                             |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                       |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                          |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
 | **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                               |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Admin Config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), you can adjust the following properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the JSON Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyJSONField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The JSON Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
 | Option              | Description                                                                                                                                                   |
 | ------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -57,7 +77,7 @@ In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-conf
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -82,7 +102,7 @@ If you only provide a URL to a schema, Payload will fetch the desired schema if
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -115,7 +135,7 @@ export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/number.mdx

@@ -6,19 +6,27 @@ desc: Number fields store and validate numeric data. Learn how to use and format
 keywords: number, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Number field stores and validates numeric entry and supports additional numerical validation
-  and formatting features.
-</Banner>
+The Number Field stores and validates numeric entry and supports additional numerical validation and formatting features.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/number.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/number-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Number field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Number field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Number field"
 />
 
-## Config
+To add a Number Field, set the `type` to `number` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyNumberField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'number', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -32,41 +40,49 @@ keywords: number, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Manageme
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                             |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                       |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                          |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
 | **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                               |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), this field type allows for the following `admin` properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Number Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`step`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set a value for the number field to increment / decrement using browser controls.
+export const MyNumberField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-**`placeholder`**
+The Number Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-Set this property to define a placeholder string for the field.
-
-**`autoComplete`**
-
-Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`step`**                     | Set a value for the number field to increment / decrement using browser controls.                                                      |
+| **`placeholder`**              | Set this property to define a placeholder string for the field.                                                                       |
+| **`autoComplete`**             | Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.                                                             |
 
 ## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/overview.mdx

@@ -2,13 +2,26 @@
 title: Fields Overview
 label: Overview
 order: 10
-desc: Fields are the building blocks of Payload, find out how to add or remove a field, change field type, add hooks, define access control and validation.
+desc: Fields are the building blocks of Payload, find out how to add or remove a field, change field type, add hooks, define Access Control and Validation.
 keywords: overview, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-Fields are the building blocks of Payload. Both [Collections](../configuration/collections) and [Globals](../configuration/globals) use fields to define the shape of the data that will be stored in the [Database](../database/overview), as well as automatically generate the corresponding UI within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).
+Fields are the building blocks of Payload. They define the schema of the Documents that will be stored in the [Database](../database/overview), as well as automatically generate the corresponding UI within the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).
 
-There are many [Field Types](#field-types) to choose from, ranging anywhere from simple text strings to nested arrays and blocks. Most fields save data to the database, while others are strictly presentational. Fields can have [Custom Validations](#validations), [Conditional Logic](../admin/fields#conditional-logic), [Access Control](#field-level-access-control), [Hooks](#field-level-hooks), and so much more.
+There are many [Field Types](#field-types) to choose from, ranging anywhere from simple text strings to nested arrays and blocks. Most fields save data to the database, while others are strictly presentational. Fields can have [Custom Validations](#validation), [Conditional Logic](../admin/fields#conditional-logic), [Access Control](#field-level-access-control), [Hooks](#field-level-hooks), and so much more.
+
+To configure fields, use the `fields` property in your [Collection](../configuration/collections) or [Global](../configuration/globals) config:
+
+```ts
+import type { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
+
+export const Page: CollectionConfig = {
+  // ...
+  fields: [ // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  ]
+}
+```
 
 <Banner type="success">
   You can fully customize the appearance and behavior of all fields within the Admin Panel. [More details](../admin/fields).
@@ -130,6 +143,7 @@ The following field names are forbidden and cannot be used:
   - `__v`
   - `salt`
   - `hash`
+  - `file`
 
 ### Field-level Hooks
 
@@ -191,7 +205,9 @@ export const MyField: Field = {
 }
 ```
 
-Default values can be defined as a static string or a function that returns a string. Functions are called with the following arguments:
+Default values can be defined as a static value or a function that returns a value. When a `defaultValue` is defined statically, Payload's DB adapters will apply it to the database schema or models.
+
+Functions can be written to make use of the following argument properties:
 
 - `user` - the authenticated user object
 - `locale` - the currently selected locale string
@@ -221,7 +237,7 @@ export const myField: Field = {
   You can use async `defaultValue` functions to fill fields with data from API requests.
 </Banner>
 
-### Validations
+### Validation
 
 Fields are automatically validated based on their [Field Type](#field-types) and other [Field Options](#field-options) such as `required` or `min` and `max` value constraints. If needed, however, field validations can be customized or entirely replaced by providing your own custom validation functions.
 
@@ -280,7 +296,7 @@ When using custom validation functions, Payload will use yours in place of the d
 To reuse default field validations, call them from within your custom validation function:
 
 ```ts
-import { text } from 'payload/fields/validations'
+import { text } from 'payload/shared'
 
 const field: Field = {
   name: 'notBad',
@@ -361,6 +377,8 @@ export const MyCollection: CollectionConfig = {
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Reminder:</strong>
   The Custom ID Fields can only be of type [`Number`](./number) or [`Text`](./text).
+
+  Custom ID fields with type `text` must not contain `/` or `.` characters.
 </Banner>
 
 ## TypeScript

docs/fields/point.mdx

@@ -3,27 +3,33 @@ title: Point Field
 label: Point
 order: 110
 desc: The Point field type stores coordinates in the database. Learn how to use Point field for geolocation and geometry.
-
 keywords: point, geolocation, geospatial, geojson, 2dsphere, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Point field type saves a pair of coordinates in the database and assigns an index for location
-  related queries.
-</Banner>
-
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Note:</strong> The Point field type is currently only supported in MongoDB.
-</Banner>
+The Point Field saves a pair of coordinates in the database and assigns an index for location related queries. The data structure in the database matches the GeoJSON structure to represent point. The Payload APIs simplifies the object data to only the [longitude, latitude] location.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/point.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/point-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Point field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Point field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Point field"
 />
 
-The data structure in the database matches the GeoJSON structure to represent point. The Payload APIs simplifies the object data to only the [longitude, latitude] location.
+To add a Point Field, set the `type` to `point` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyPointField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'point', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+<Banner type="warning">
+  <strong>Important:</strong>
+  The Point Field is currently only supported in MongoDB.
+</Banner>
 
 ## Config
 
@@ -34,29 +40,26 @@ The data structure in the database matches the GeoJSON structure to represent po
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                              |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. To support location queries, point index defaults to `2dsphere`, to disable the index set to `false`. |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                              |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                             |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                                |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                                   |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                           |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                     |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                        |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                          |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                      |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                           |
 | **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                       |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                                 |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](../admin/fields#admin-options).                                                                                                              |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                 |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                               |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                          |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-<Banner type="warning">
-  <strong>Note:</strong> The Point field type is currently only supported in MongoDB.
-</Banner>
-
 ## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/radio.mdx

@@ -6,19 +6,32 @@ desc: The Radio field type allows for the selection of one value from a predefin
 keywords: radio, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Radio Group field type allows for the selection of one value from a predefined set of possible
-  values and presents a radio group-style set of inputs to the Admin Panel.
-</Banner>
+The Radio Field allows for the selection of one value from a predefined set of possible values and presents a radio group-style set of inputs to the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview).
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/radio.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/radio-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Radio field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Radio field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Radio field"
 />
 
-## Config
+To add a Radio Field, set the `type` to `radio` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyRadioField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'radio',
+  options: [
+    // ...
+  ]
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -27,17 +40,18 @@ keywords: radio, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Managemen
 | **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                     |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                             |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                       |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                          |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. The default value must exist within provided values in `options`. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)      |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
 | **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                               |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
-| **`enumName`**         | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                             |
+| **`enumName`**         | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                             |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -50,20 +64,33 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
   being used as a GraphQL enum.
 </Banner>
 
-## Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Radio Group field type allows for the specification of the following `admin` properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Radio Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`layout`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-The `layout` property allows for the radio group to be styled as a horizonally or vertically distributed list. The default value is `horizontal`.
+export const MyRadioField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
+
+The Radio Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
+
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`layout`**                   | Allows for the radio group to be styled as a horizonally or vertically distributed list. The default value is `horizontal`.          |
 
 ## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/relationship.mdx

@@ -6,25 +6,36 @@ desc: The Relationship field provides the ability to relate documents together.
 keywords: relationship, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Relationship field is one of the most powerful fields Payload features. It provides for the
-  ability to easily relate documents together.
-</Banner>
+The Relationship Field is one of the most powerful fields Payload features. It provides for the ability to easily relate documents together.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/relationship.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/relationship-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a relationship field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a relationship field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Relationship field"
 />
 
-**Example uses:**
+The Relationship field is used in a variety of ways, including:
 
 - To add `Product` documents to an `Order` document
 - To allow for an `Order` to feature a `placedBy` relationship to either an `Organization` or `User` collection
 - To assign `Category` documents to `Post` documents
 
-## Config
+To add a Relationship Field, set the `type` to `relationship` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyRelationshipField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'relationship',
+  relationTo: 'products',
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                     |
 | ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -39,45 +50,49 @@ keywords: relationship, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Ma
 | **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                    |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                    |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often.     |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                   |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                      |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                         |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                 |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                           |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                              |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                            |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                 |
 | **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                             |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                        |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                                   |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                       |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                     |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>Tip:</strong>
-  <br />
-  The [Depth](/docs/getting-started/concepts#depth) parameter can be used to automatically populate
-  related documents that are returned by the API.
+  The [Depth](../queries/depth) parameter can be used to automatically populate related documents that are returned by the API.
 </Banner>
 
-## Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Relationship field type also
-allows for the following admin-specific properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Relationship Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`isSortable`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using drag and drop (only works when `hasMany`
-is set to `true`).
+export const MyRelationshipField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-**`allowCreate`**
+The Relationship Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-Set to `false` if you'd like to disable the ability to create new documents from within the relationship field (hides
-the "Add new" button in the admin UI).
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                              |
+| ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`isSortable`**               | Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using drag and drop (only works when `hasMany` is set to `true`). |
+| **`allowCreate`**              | Set to `false` if you'd like to disable the ability to create new documents from within the relationship field.                             |
+| **`sortOptions`**              | Define a default sorting order for the options within a Relationship field's dropdown. [More](#sortOptions)                                |
 
-**`sortOptions`**
-
-The `sortOptions` property allows you to define a default sorting order for the options within a Relationship field's
-dropdown. This can be particularly useful for ensuring that the most relevant options are presented first to the user.
+### Sort Options
 
 You can specify `sortOptions` in two ways:
 
@@ -143,7 +158,7 @@ called with an argument object with the following properties:
 ## Example
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',
@@ -179,9 +194,15 @@ You can learn more about writing queries [here](/docs/queries/overview).
   When a relationship field has both <strong>filterOptions</strong> and a custom{' '}
   <strong>validate</strong> function, the api will not validate <strong>filterOptions</strong>{' '}
   unless you call the default relationship field validation function imported from{' '}
-  <strong>payload/fields/validations</strong> in your validate function.
+  <strong>payload/shared</strong> in your validate function.
 </Banner>
 
+## Bi-directional relationships
+
+The `relationship` field on its own is used to define relationships for the document that contains the relationship field, and this can be considered as a "one-way" relationship. For example, if you have a Post that has a `category` relationship field on it, the related `category` itself will not surface any information about the posts that have the category set.
+
+However, the `relationship` field can be used in conjunction with the `Join` field to produce powerful bi-directional relationship authoring capabilities. If you're interested in bi-directional relationships, check out the [documentation for the Join field](./join).
+
 ## How the data is saved
 
 Given the variety of options possible within the `relationship` field type, the shape of the data needed for creating

docs/fields/rich-text.mdx

@@ -6,15 +6,12 @@ desc: The Rich Text field allows dynamic content to be written through the Admin
 keywords: rich text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Rich Text field is a powerful way to allow editors to write dynamic content. The content is
-  saved as JSON in the database and can be converted into any format, including HTML, that you need.
-</Banner>
+The Rich Text Field is a powerful way to allow editors to write dynamic content. The content is saved as JSON in the database and can be converted into any format, including HTML, that you need.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/richtext.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/richtext-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Rich Text field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Rich Text field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Rich Text field"
 />
 
@@ -23,7 +20,7 @@ Payload's rich text field is built on an "adapter pattern" which lets you specif
 Right now, Payload is officially supporting two rich text editors:
 
 1. [SlateJS](/docs/rich-text/slate) - stable, backwards-compatible with 1.0
-2. [Lexical](/docs/rich-text/lexical) - beta, where things will be moving
+2. [Lexical](/docs/lexical/overview) - beta, where things will be moving
 
 <Banner type="success">
   <strong>
@@ -39,43 +36,51 @@ Right now, Payload is officially supporting two rich text editors:
   will allow you to apply your learnings elsewhere as well.
 </Banner>
 
-## Config
+## Config Options
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                             |
-| ---------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                  |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                 |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)            |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.           |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                              |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control) |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.        |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                    |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                         |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                     |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                               |
-| **`editor`**           | Override the rich text editor specified in your base configuration for this field.                                                                      |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                               |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                             |
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                      |
+| ---------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                           |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                          |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                  |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                            |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                               |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                 |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                             |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                  |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                              |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                    |
+| **`editor`**           | Override the rich text editor specified in your base configuration for this field.                                                                               |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                        |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                      |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges) |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Rich Text editor allows for the following admin properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Rich Text Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`placeholder`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set this property to define a placeholder string in the text input.
+export const MyRichTextField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-**`hideGutter`**
+The Rich Text Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the admin panel. The field gutter is rendered as a vertical line and padding, but often if this field is nested within a Group, Block, or Array, you may want to hide the gutter.
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                            |
+| ------------------------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`placeholder`**              | Set this property to define a placeholder string for the field.                                                                         |
+| **`hideGutter`**               | Set this property to `true` to hide this field's gutter within the Admin Panel.                                                         |
+| **`rtl`**                      | Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.            |
 
-**`rtl`**
+## Editor-specific Options
 
-Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.
-
-## Editor-specific options
-
-For a ton more editor-specific options, including how to build custom rich text elements directly into your editor, take a look at either the [Slate docs](/docs/rich-text/slate) or the [Lexical docs](/docs/rich-text/lexical) depending on which editor you're using.
+For a ton more editor-specific options, including how to build custom rich text elements directly into your editor, take a look at either the [Slate docs](/docs/rich-text/slate) or the [Lexical docs](/docs/lexical/overview) depending on which editor you're using.

docs/fields/row.mdx

@@ -6,24 +6,37 @@ desc: With the Row field you can arrange fields next to each other in the Admin
 keywords: row, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Row field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin Panel. By using it, you can
-  arrange fields next to each other horizontally.
-</Banner>
+The Row Field is presentational-only and only affects the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview). By using it, you can arrange [Fields](./overview) next to each other horizontally.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/row.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/row-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a row field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a row field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Row field"
 />
 
-## Config
+To add a Row Field, set the `type` to `row` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyRowField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'row',
+  fields: [
+    // ...
+  ]
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option          | Description                                                                                                                                                                |
 | --------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
 | **`fields`** \* | Array of field types to nest within this Row.                                                                                                                              |
-| **`admin`**     | Admin-specific configuration excluding `description`, `readOnly`, and `hidden`. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details. |
+| **`admin`**     | Admin-specific configuration excluding `description`, `readOnly`, and `hidden`. [More details](../admin/fields#admin-options). |
 | **`custom`**    | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                  |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
@@ -33,7 +46,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/select.mdx

@@ -6,71 +6,94 @@ desc: The Select field provides a dropdown-style interface for choosing options
 keywords: select, multi-select, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Select field provides a dropdown-style interface for choosing options from a predefined list
-  as an enumeration.
-</Banner>
+The Select Field provides a dropdown-style interface for choosing options from a predefined list as an enumeration.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/select.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/select-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a Select field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a Select field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Select field"
 />
 
-## Config
+To add a Select Field, set the `type` to `select` in your [Field Config](./overview):
 
-| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                   |
-| ---------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                        |
-| **`options`** \*       | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing a `label` string and a `value` string.                     |
-| **`hasMany`**          | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many selections instead of only one.                                                                                |
-| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                       |
-| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                  |
-| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                  |
-| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often.   |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                                 |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                    |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                       |
-| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                              |
-| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                          |
-| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                               |
-| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                           |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details.                                                      |
-| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                     |
-| **`enumName`**         | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                               |
-| **`dbName`**           | Custom table name (if `hasMany` set to `true`) for this field when using SQL database adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined. |
-| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                   |
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MySelectField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'select',
+  options: [
+    // ...
+  ]
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
+
+| Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                                  |
+| ---------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`name`** \*          | To be used as the property name when stored and retrieved from the database. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-names)                                                                       |
+| **`options`** \*       | Array of options to allow the field to store. Can either be an array of strings, or an array of objects containing a `label` string and a `value` string.                                    |
+| **`hasMany`**          | Boolean when, if set to `true`, allows this field to have many selections instead of only one.                                                                                               |
+| **`label`**            | Text used as a field label in the Admin Panel or an object with keys for each language.                                                                                                      |
+| **`unique`**           | Enforce that each entry in the Collection has a unique value for this field.                                                                                                                 |
+| **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                                 |
+| **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often.                  |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                                              |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                                        |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                                           |
+| **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                                             |
+| **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                                         |
+| **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                                              |
+| **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                                          |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-options) for more details.                                                                    |
+| **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                                    |
+| **`enumName`**         | Custom enum name for this field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                                              |
+| **`dbName`**           | Custom table name (if `hasMany` set to `true`) for this field when using SQL Database Adapter ([Postgres](/docs/database/postgres)). Auto-generated from name if not defined.                |
+| **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                                  |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                             |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
 <Banner type="warning">
   <strong>Important:</strong>
-  <br />
   Option values should be strings that do not contain hyphens or special characters due to GraphQL
   enumeration naming constraints. Underscores are allowed. If you determine you need your option
   values to be non-strings or contain special characters, they will be formatted accordingly before
   being used as a GraphQL enum.
 </Banner>
 
-## Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Select field type also allows for the following admin-specific properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Select Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`isClearable`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be clearable within the Admin UI.
+export const MySelectField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-**`isSortable`**
+The Select Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using drag and drop. (Only works when `hasMany` is set to `true`)
+| Property                       | Description                                                                                                                              |
+| ------------------------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`isClearable`**              | Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be clearable within the Admin UI.                                                              |
+| **`isSortable`**               | Set to `true` if you'd like this field to be sortable within the Admin UI using drag and drop. (Only works when `hasMany` is set to `true`) |
 
 ## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/tabs.mdx

@@ -6,25 +6,37 @@ desc: The Tabs field is a great way to organize complex editing experiences into
 keywords: tabs, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Tabs field is presentational-only and only affects the Admin Panel (unless a tab is named). By
-  using it, you can place fields within a nice layout component that separates certain sub-fields by
-  a tabbed interface.
-</Banner>
+The Tabs Field is presentational-only and only affects the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) (unless a tab is named). By using it, you can place fields within a nice layout component that separates certain sub-fields by a tabbed interface.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/tabs.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/tabs-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a tabs field used to separate Hero and Page layout in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a tabs field used to separate Hero and Page layout in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Tabs field type used to separate Hero fields from Page Layout"
 />
 
-## Config
+To add a Tabs Field, set the `type` to `tabs` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyTabsField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  // highlight-start
+  type: 'tabs',
+  tabs: [
+    // ...
+  ]
+  // highlight-end
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option        | Description                                                                                                              |
 | ------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ |
 | **`tabs`** \* | Array of tabs to render within this Tabs field.                                                                          |
-| **`admin`**   | Admin-specific configuration. See the [default field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config) for more details. |
+| **`admin`**   | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](../admin/fields#admin-options). |
 | **`custom`**  | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                |
 
 ### Tab-specific Config
@@ -38,6 +50,7 @@ Each tab must have either a `name` or `label` and the required `fields` array. Y
 | **`fields`** \*     | The fields to render within this tab.                                                                                                                                                                        |
 | **`description`**   | Optionally render a description within this tab to describe the contents of the tab itself.                                                                                                                  |
 | **`interfaceName`** | Create a top level, reusable [Typescript interface](/docs/typescript/generating-types#custom-field-interfaces) & [GraphQL type](/docs/graphql/graphql-schema#custom-field-schemas). (`name` must be present) |
+| **`virtual`**       | Provide `true` to disable field in the database (`name` must be present). See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)                    |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
@@ -46,7 +59,7 @@ _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',

docs/fields/text.mdx

@@ -6,19 +6,27 @@ desc: Text field types simply save a string to the database and provide the Admi
 keywords: text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management System, cms, headless, javascript, node, react, nextjs
 ---
 
-<Banner>
-  The Text field type is one of the most commonly used fields. It saves a string to the database and
-  provides the Admin Panel with a simple text input.
-</Banner>
+The Text Field is one of the most commonly used fields. It saves a string to the database and provides the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview) with a simple text input.
 
 <LightDarkImage
   srcLight="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/text.png"
   srcDark="https://payloadcms.com/images/docs/fields/text-dark.png"
-  alt="Shows a text field and read-only text field in the Payload admin panel"
+  alt="Shows a text field and read-only text field in the Payload Admin Panel"
   caption="Admin Panel screenshot of a Text field and read-only Text field"
 />
 
-## Config
+To add a Text Field, set the `type` to `text` in your [Field Config](./overview):
+
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
+
+export const MyTextField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  type: 'text', // highlight-line
+}
+```
+
+## Config Options
 
 | Option                 | Description                                                                                                                                                                 |
 | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -29,44 +37,52 @@ keywords: text, fields, config, configuration, documentation, Content Management
 | **`maxLength`**        | Used by the default validation function to ensure values are of a maximum character length.                                                                                 |
 | **`validate`**         | Provide a custom validation function that will be executed on both the Admin Panel and the backend. [More](/docs/fields/overview#validation)                                |
 | **`index`**            | Build an [index](/docs/database/overview) for this field to produce faster queries. Set this field to `true` if your users will perform queries on this field's data often. |
-| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/config), include its data in the user JWT.                               |
-| **`hooks`**            | Provide field-based hooks to control logic for this field. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-hooks)                                                                  |
-| **`access`**           | Provide field-based access control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More](/docs/fields/overview#field-level-access-control)                     |
+| **`saveToJWT`**        | If this field is top-level and nested in a config supporting [Authentication](/docs/authentication/overview), include its data in the user JWT.                             |
+| **`hooks`**            | Provide Field Hooks to control logic for this field. [More details](../hooks/fields).                                                                                       |
+| **`access`**           | Provide Field Access Control to denote what users can see and do with this field's data. [More details](../access-control/fields).                                          |
 | **`hidden`**           | Restrict this field's visibility from all APIs entirely. Will still be saved to the database, but will not appear in any API or the Admin Panel.                            |
 | **`defaultValue`**     | Provide data to be used for this field's default value. [More](/docs/fields/overview#default-values)                                                                        |
 | **`localized`**        | Enable localization for this field. Requires [localization to be enabled](/docs/configuration/localization) in the Base config.                                             |
 | **`required`**         | Require this field to have a value.                                                                                                                                         |
-| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. See below for [more detail](#admin-config).                                                                                                   |
+| **`admin`**            | Admin-specific configuration. [More details](#admin-options).                                                                                                               |
 | **`custom`**           | Extension point for adding custom data (e.g. for plugins)                                                                                                                   |
 | **`hasMany`**          | Makes this field an ordered array of text instead of just a single text.                                                                                                    |
 | **`minRows`**          | Minimum number of texts in the array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                          |
 | **`maxRows`**          | Maximum number of texts in the array, if `hasMany` is set to true.                                                                                                          |
 | **`typescriptSchema`** | Override field type generation with providing a JSON schema                                                                                                                 |
+| **`virtual`**          | Provide `true` to disable field in the database. See [Virtual Fields](https://payloadcms.com/blog/learn-how-virtual-fields-can-help-solve-common-cms-challenges)            |
 
 _\* An asterisk denotes that a property is required._
 
-## Admin config
+## Admin Options
 
-In addition to the default [field admin config](/docs/fields/overview#admin-config), the Text field type allows for the following `admin` properties:
+The customize the appearance and behavior of the Text Field in the [Admin Panel](../admin/overview), you can use the `admin` option:
 
-**`placeholder`**
+```ts
+import type { Field } from 'payload/types'
 
-Set this property to define a placeholder string in the text input.
+export const MyTextField: Field = {
+  // ...
+  admin: { // highlight-line
+    // ...
+  },
+}
+```
 
-**`autoComplete`**
+The Text Field inherits all of the default options from the base [Field Admin Config](../admin/fields#admin-options), plus the following additional options:
 
-Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.
-
-**`rtl`**
-
-Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction.
+| Option         | Description                                                                                                      |
+| -------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| **`placeholder`** | Set this property to define a placeholder string in the text input.                                              |
+| **`autoComplete`** | Set this property to a string that will be used for browser autocomplete.                                        |
+| **`rtl`**        | Override the default text direction of the Admin Panel for this field. Set to `true` to force right-to-left text direction. |
 
 ## Example
 
 `collections/ExampleCollection.ts`
 
 ```ts
-import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload/types'
+import { CollectionConfig } from 'payload'
 
 export const ExampleCollection: CollectionConfig = {
   slug: 'example-collection',